Service Manual

iPF800 series

Aug 13 2008
 Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
 Introduction

Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:

Symbol Description

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

 Introduction

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, how-
ever, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
 Contents

Contents

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Overview .......................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.2 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 3
1.2 Features .....................................................................................................................................................1- 5
1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 5
1.2.2 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 5
1.2.3 Printhead ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 5
1.2.4 Ink tank .................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.2.5 Cutter....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.6 Roll holder ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.7 Stand ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.8 Stand ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.9 Wheeled output stacker........................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.10 Media take-up unit ................................................................................................................................................. 1- 9
1.2.11 Hard disk drive..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.12 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board ................................................................................................................................. 1- 11
1.2.13 Consumables....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.3 Product Specifications ..............................................................................................................................1- 13
1.3.1 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.3.2 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 14
1.4 Detailed Specifications .............................................................................................................................1- 15
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction...................................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.4.2 Interface Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.5 Names and Functions of Components .....................................................................................................1- 23
1.5.1 Front ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 23
1.5.2 Front ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 25
1.5.3 Rear....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 26
1.5.4 Rear....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27
1.5.5 Top Cover (Inside)................................................................................................................................................. 1- 28
1.5.6 Carriage................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 29
1.5.7 Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 29
1.6 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................1- 30
1.6.1 Operation Panel..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 30
1.6.2 Main Menu............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 31
1.6.3 Main Menu............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 51
1.6.4 Basket Unit ............................................................................................................................................................ 1- 71
1.7 Safety and Precautions ............................................................................................................................1- 77
1.7.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 77
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 77
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 78
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 80
1.7.2 Other Precautions.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 81
1.7.2.1 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 81
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 82
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 83
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer...................................................................................................................... 1- 85
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer ................................................................................................................................. 1- 85
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 85
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ..................................................................................................................................... 1- 85
1.7.3.4 Self-diagnostic Feature .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 85
 Contents

1.7.3.5 Disposing of the Lithium Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 85

Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.1 Basic Operation Outline ............................................................................................................................. 2- 1
2.1.1 Printer Diagram........................................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.2 Printer Diagram........................................................................................................................................................2- 2
2.1.3 Print Signal Sequence .............................................................................................................................................2- 3
2.1.4 Print Driving .............................................................................................................................................................2- 4
2.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 6
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on............................................................................................................................2- 6
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off............................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.3 Print Control .............................................................................................................................................................2- 8
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function ........................................................................................................................2- 15
2.2.5 Head Management ................................................................................................................................................2- 15
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control .............................................................................................................2- 15
2.2.7 Pause between Pages ...........................................................................................................................................2- 15
2.2.8 White Raster Skip ..................................................................................................................................................2- 15
2.2.9 Sleep Mode............................................................................................................................................................2- 15
2.2.10 Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................................2- 15
2.3 Printer Mechanical System....................................................................................................................... 2- 17
2.3.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................2- 17
2.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 17
2.3.2 Ink Passage ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 18
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 18
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 19
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 21
2.3.2.4 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 24
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 25
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 29
2.3.2.7 Air Flow .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 30
2.3.3 Paper Path .............................................................................................................................................................2- 31
2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 31
2.3.3.2 Paper Path ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 32
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 35
2.4 Printer Electrical System .......................................................................................................................... 2- 36
2.4.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................2- 36
2.4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 36
2.4.1.2 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 38
2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................2- 40
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 40
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB...............................................................................................................................................2- 42
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 42
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB....................................................................................................................................................2- 42
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components................................................................................................................................................. 2- 42
2.4.5 Motor Driver ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 44
2.4.5.1 Media take-up PCB components ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 44
2.4.5.2 Lower roll unit PCB components............................................................................................................................................ 2- 44
2.4.6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ........................................................................................................................2- 44
2.4.6.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components...................................................................................................................... 2- 44
2.4.7 Power Supply.........................................................................................................................................................2- 45
2.4.7.1 Power supply block diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 2- 45
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................ 2- 46
2.5.1 Sensors for covers .................................................................................................................................................2- 46
2.5.2 Ink passage system ...............................................................................................................................................2- 47
2.5.3 Carriage system.....................................................................................................................................................2- 49
2.5.4 Paper path system .................................................................................................................................................2- 51
2.5.5 Media take-up Unit.................................................................................................................................................2- 53
 Contents

2.5.6 Others.................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 53

Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Transporting the Printer ..............................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.1 Transporting the Printer........................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 13
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 13

Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
4.1 Service Parts ..............................................................................................................................................4- 1
4.1.1 Service parts............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 1
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...........................................................................................................................4- 2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly .......................................................................................4- 2
4.3.1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly ....................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.3.4 External Covers ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.3.5 Drive Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 4- 16
4.3.6 Cutter..................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 18
4.3.7 Carriage Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 20
4.3.8 Ink Tube Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 24
4.3.9 Pick-up/Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 4- 27
4.3.10 Pick-up/Feed Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 29
4.3.11 Purge Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 32
4.3.12 Waste Ink Collection Unit..................................................................................................................................... 4- 33
4.3.13 Ink Tank Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 43
4.3.14 Multi Sensor......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 45
4.3.15 Linear Encoder Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 4- 48
4.3.16 Head Management Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 4- 49
4.3.17 PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 50
4.3.18 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit ............................................................................................................. 4- 51
4.3.19 Opening and closing ink supply valves................................................................................................................ 4- 52
4.3.20 Draining the ink.................................................................................................................................................... 4- 53
4.4 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................4- 54
4.4.1 Applying the Grease .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 54
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ....................................................................................................................4- 57
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 57
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ............................................................................... 4- 57
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder ..................................................................... 4- 57
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor................................................................................... 4- 57

Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .......................................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.2 Consumable Parts ......................................................................................................................................5- 1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................................................................5- 2
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 5- 2

Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
 Contents

6.1 Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement ........................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2.1 Main controller PCB .................................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB ................................................................................................................................................6- 11
6.2.3 Head relay PCB .....................................................................................................................................................6- 16
6.3 Version Up................................................................................................................................................ 6- 20
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool ...........................................................................................................................................6- 20
6.4 Service Tools............................................................................................................................................ 6- 21
6.4.1 Tool List .................................................................................................................................................................6- 21

Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

7.1 Service Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 1
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation ..........................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 2
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode ...........................................................................................................................................7- 8
7.1.4 Sample Printout .....................................................................................................................................................7- 17
7.2 Special Mode............................................................................................................................................ 7- 21
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ..................................................................................................................................7- 21

Chapter 8 ERROR CODE

8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 1
8.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................8- 1
8.2 Warning Table ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 2
8.2.1 Warnings..................................................................................................................................................................8- 2
8.3 Error Table ................................................................................................................................................. 8- 4
8.3.1 Errors .......................................................................................................................................................................8- 4
8.4 Sevice Call Table ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 11
8.4.1 Service Call Errors .................................................................................................................................................8- 11
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
 Contents

Contents

1.1 Product Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Product Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2 Product Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Features ..........................................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.2.1 Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.2 Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.3 Printhead ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.4 Ink tank ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.5 Cutter............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.2.6 Roll holder ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.7 Stand ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.8 Stand ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.9 Wheeled output stacker................................................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.10 Media take-up unit ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.11 Hard disk drive......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.12 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board .................................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.13 Consumables ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.3 Product Specifications..................................................................................................................................................1-13
1.3.1 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.3.2 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.4 Detailed Specifications ................................................................................................................................................1-15
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.4.2 Interface Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.5 Names and Functions of Components .........................................................................................................................1-23
1.5.1 Front ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.5.2 Front ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.5.3 Rear ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-26
1.5.4 Rear ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.5.5 Top Cover (Inside) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.5.6 Carriage...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29
1.5.7 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)............................................................................................................................................................. 1-29
1.6 Basic Operation............................................................................................................................................................1-30
1.6.1 Operation Panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-30
1.6.2 Main Menu................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-31
1.6.3 Main Menu................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-51
1.6.4 Basket Unit................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-71
1.7 Safety and Precautions .................................................................................................................................................1-77
1.7.1 Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-77
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-77
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink.............................................................................................................................................................................................1-78
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-80
1.7.2 Other Precautions....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-81
1.7.2.1 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................1-81
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-82
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-83
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 1-85
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer.........................................................................................................................................................1-85
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version ................................................................................................................................................................1-85
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ............................................................................................................................................................1-85
1.7.3.4 Self-diagnostic Feature..................................................................................................................................................................................1-85
1.7.3.5 Disposing of the Lithium Battery..................................................................................................................................................................1-85
 Chapter 1

1.1 Product Overview

1.1.1 Product Overview

0020-5395

iPF810

This printer is a large-format printer that prints in a maximum width of 44 inches with high-speed photographic picture quality.
This printer is a stand-mounted type printer and is capable of output to either roll media or cut sheet.

[1] [9]

[2]

[10]

[13] [12]
[16]

[19] [5] [13]

[6]
[14]
[17]
[3] [18]
[11] [15]

[8] [7] [19]

[4]
[20]

F-1-1
T-1-1

[1] Upper Cover [11] Release Lever

[2] Ejection Guide [12] Maintenance Cartridge
[3] Roll Holder Slot [13] Carrying Handles
[4] Roll Holder [14] Maintenance Cartridge Cover
[5] Ejection Support [15] Stand
[6] Output Stacker [16] Stand L
[7] Paper Feed Slot [17] Stand R
[8] Holder Stopper [18] Stand Upper Stay
[9] Ink Tank Cover [19] Leg cover
[10] Operation Panel [20] Stopper

1-1
 Chapter 1

[3] [2] [1]

[4] [8]

[5]

[7]

[6]

F-1-2
T-1-2

[1] Expansion Board Slot [5] Madia Take-up Unit Connector

[2] Ethernet Connector [6] Power Supply Connector
[3] USB Port [7] Carrying Handles
[4] Manual Pocket [8] Accessory Handles

1-2
 Chapter 1

1.1.2 Product Overview

0020-5396

iPF820

This printer is a large-format printer that prints in a maximum width of 44 inches with high-speed photographic picture quality.
This printer is a stand-mounted type printer and is capable of output to either roll media or cut sheet.

[1] [8]

[2]

[9]

[12] [11]

[15] [12]
[17] [10]
[13]

[16]

[14]
[3] [17]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[20]
[3] [18]

[4]

[19]

[7]

[6]
F-1-3
T-1-3

[1] Upper Cover [11] Maintenance Cartridge

[2] Ejection Guide [12] Carrying Handles
[3] Roll Holder Slot [13] Maintenance Cartridge Cover
[4] Roll Holder [14] Stand
[5] Cut Sheet Protective Cloth [15] Stand L
[6] Paper Feed Slot [16] Stand R
[7] Holder Stopper [17] Leg Cover
[8] Ink Tank Cover [18] Stopper
[9] Operation Panel [19] Lower Roll Unit
[10] Release Lever [20] Lower Roll Unit Lever

1-3
 Chapter 1

[3] [2] [1]

[4] [8]

[7]

[5]

[6]

F-1-4
T-1-4

[1] Expansion Board Slot [5] Power Supply Connector

[2] Ethernet Connector [6] Lower Roll Unit Connector
[3] USB Port [7] Carrying Handles
[4] Manual Pocket [8] Accessory Box

1-4
 Chapter 1

1.2 Features

1.2.1 Features
0020-5397

iPF820

- Media pass in widths up to 44 inches (1117.6 mm).

- Large ink tanks save the need for their replacement.
- Uninterrupted printing from subtanks.
- BK and MBK inks are loaded concurrently to eliminate the need for their replacement.
- Durability will be added by maintenance kit.
- Large LCD panel displays more information and makes operations easier.
- High resolutions of 2400 x 1200 dpi maximum, coupled with the exceptionally light-fast, water-proof and ozone-proof five-color inks of Y, M, C, BK and MBK,
deliver high-quality photographic picture quality.
- USB2.0 Hi-speed interface and 10Base-T/100Base-TX in standard support of a TCP/IP network, plus optional support of IEEE1394.
- Barcodes printed on roll media make remaining roll media management possible.
- Borderless four-side printing support (roll media) removes laborious cutting work, easing the job of creating posters to a significant degree.
- High-speed printing with a 1-inch head for each color (1,280 nozzles), under bidirectional print control.
- Ink supply through tubing to a completely independent printhead and large-capacity ink tanks.
- Hard disk drive mounted for greater ease of job management and for driving on night time.

Functional enhancements new to this model include:

- Enhanced productivity
The product allows two roll medias to be loaded simultaneously, making it possible to mix different sizes or types of paper in a single print job or use two roll
medias of the same paper size to fulfill bulk print needs.
- Enhanced ease of operation
Ready for CAD drawings output on the HP-GL/2 and HP-RTL.
The product comes with a wheeled output stacker to print lengthy materials or load bulk print jobs.

1.2.2 Features
0020-5413

iPF810

- Media pass in widths up to 44 inches (1117.6 mm).

- Large ink tanks save the need for their replacement.
- Uninterrupted printing from subtanks.
- BK and MBK inks are loaded concurrently to eliminate the need for their replacement.
- Media take-up unit (option) is supported.
- Media take-up unit (option) can be mounted concurrently with a basket.
- Durability will be added by maintenance kit.
- Large LCD panel displays more information and makes operations easier.
- High resolutions of 2400 x 1200 dpi maximum, coupled with the exceptionally light-fast, water-proof and ozone-proof five-color inks of MBK, BK, C, M, and
Y, deliver high-quality photographic picture quality.
- USB2.0 Hi-speed interface and 10Base-T/100Base-TX in standard support of a TCP/IP network, plus optional support of IEEE1394.
- Barcodes printed on roll media make remaining roll media management possible.
- Borderless four-side printing support (roll media) removes laborious cutting work, easing the job of creating posters to a significant degree.
- High-speed printing with a 1-inch head for each color (1,280 nozzles), under bidirectional print control.
- Ink supply through tubing to a completely independent printhead and large-capacity ink tanks.
- Hard disk drive mounted for greater ease of job management and for driving on night time.

Functional enhancements new to this model include:

- Enhanced ease of operation
Ready for CAD drawings output on the HP-GL/2 and HP-RTL.
The product can be fitted with a wheeled output stacker as an option to print lengthy materials or load bulk print jobs.

1.2.3 Printhead
0013-2742

iPF810 / iPF820
The printhead that mounts on the carriage is an integrated six-color disposable printhead.
It has 2,560 nozzles for each color, comprising two trays of 1,280 nozzles each arranged in a zigzag pattern.
If print quality remains unimproved even after a specified cleaning operation, replace the printhead. Replacement about one year after the date of initial unpacking
is also recommended.

F-1-5

1.2.4 Ink tank

0020-5419

iPF810 / iPF820

1-5
 Chapter 1

Ink tanks are disposable.

An ink tank should be replaced when an ink tank replacement prompt message appears or when six months expire after the date of initial unpacking, whichever
occurs earlier.
To install ink tanks, open the right cover of the printer. Ink tanks are furnished with a notch for preventing incorrect installation, which will allow the tanks to be
installed at the position marked in the right color and nowhere else.
Ink tanks are available in the four dye ink colors of black, cyan, magenta and yellow and the pigment ink color of mat black.

F-1-6

1-6
 Chapter 1

1.2.5 Cutter
0020-5420

iPF810 / iPF820

The cutter attached to the cutter unit is a round cutter.

F-1-7

1.2.6 Roll holder

0020-5421

iPF810 / iPF820

The roller holder accepts paper tubes having inside diameters of both 2 and 3 inches. It is furnished with attachments for 2- and 3-inch diameter paper tubes.
The roll holder clamps the paper tube of a roll not exceeding 150 mm in outside diameter from the inside.

F-1-8
[2-inch paper tube attachment]

F-1-9
[3-inch paper tube attachment 1]

F-1-10
[3-inch paper tube attachment 2]

F-1-11

1-7
 Chapter 1

1.2.7 Stand
0020-6040

iPF820

It is a stand that puts the printer. Equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved.

F-1-12

1.2.8 Stand
0020-6038

iPF810

It is a stand that puts the printer. Equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved.

F-1-13

1.2.9 Wheeled output stacker

0020-5422

iPF810 / iPF820

This is a output stacker on wheels that is attached to the front of the printer.

1-8
 Chapter 1

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]
F-1-14
T-1-5

[1] Basket [3] Basket foot stand

[2] Basket eject guide [4] Stopper

1.2.10 Media take-up unit

0020-5423

iPF810
Media take-up unit
The media take-up unit takes up roll media, ranging in width from 17 to 44 inches, on a 2 or 3-inch paper tube in roll form after they are printed by the host computer.
Taking up begins automatically when a sensor attached to the bottom of the stand detects a roll delivered after printing falling down due to the weight of a weight
roller.
Rolls may also be manually taken up by using a button on the media take-up unit.
The media take-up unit has an overload protection feature to prevent accidents while taking up rolls. (The feature will shut down the motor automatically when an
overload occurs while taking up a roll.)

Additional features of the media take-up unit include:

- An adapter may be installed to support a 3-inch paper tube.
- Rolls can be rewound by feeding them backward to visually check images.
- Weight rollers varying in length to suit specific roll widths ensure added takeup efficiency.
- The printer detects errors in the media take-up unit by itself.
- Linked with the printer's sleep mode.

[5]

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]
F-1-15
T-1-6

[1] Left media take-up unit [4] Media take-up unit

[2] Rewind spool [5] 3-inch adapter
[3] Media take-up sensor

1-9
 Chapter 1

Weight
This weight consists of weight roll(7 pcs.)[1], weight flange(2 sets)[2] and weight joint[3].

[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]
[1]
[3]

[1]

[2]
F-1-16

1-10
 Chapter 1

1.2.11 Hard disk drive

0017-8472

iPF810 / iPF820

Each print job received from the host computer is saved to the 80GB hard disk drive(serial ATA connection) attached to the printer, so the printer can print the job
repeatedly as needed, without having to wait for its retransmission from the host computer.
Saving print jobs will offer the following benefits:
- Eased computer workload
A print job may be automatically preserved to the hard disk when printing or may be preserved to the hard disk without printing. A print job preserved can be
printed in as many copies as needed without having to use the host computer.

- Reprinting after error occurrence

If the printer encounters errors, such as paper out, while printing a print job, it can resume the print operation as soon as the errors are cleared, without needing its
retransmission from the host computer.

- Higher print work efficiency

Print jobs can be printed selectively or in a specified number of copies without using a host computer. Multiple print jobs can be printed batched. Unattended print
operations in the nighttime are also possible.

1.2.12 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board

0016-8123

iPF810 / iPF820

IEEE1394 (FireWire) expansion board (option)

An interface board that provides an additional IEEE1394 (FireWire) port.

F-1-17

1-11
 Chapter 1

1.2.13 Consumables
0020-5424

iPF810 / iPF820

Printhead
The expendable printhead is the same as the one that comes with the printer.

F-1-18
Ink tanks
Expendable ink tanks are available in five colors: mat black, black, cyan, magenta and yellow. Each is further available in two capacities: 300ml and 700ml.
All ink tanks are usable for six months after unpacking.
Ink tanks that can be used with this printer are labeled "A" on their side.

F-1-19
Maintenance cartridge
The expendable maintenance cartridge is the same as the one that comes with the printer.

F-1-20

1-12
 Chapter 1

1.3 Product Specifications

1.3.1 Product Specifications

0020-5426

iPF820

Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer (stand model)

Feeding system Roll media: Upper roll/Lower roll (front loading)
Cut sheet: Paper tray (front loading)
Feeding capacity - Roll media
2 roll madia
Outer diameter of roll: 150 mm or less
- Cut sheet
1 sheet
Delivery method Forward delivery, face up
Sheet delivery capability 1 sheet (using the wheeled outout stacker of the stand)
However, 20 sheets can be stacked according to the condition (A0/B0
size plain paper).
Cutter Automatic cross-cutter (round blade)

Type of media Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),
Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper,
Glossy Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Backlit Film, Backprint
Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Fine Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight
Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas Matte, Premium Coated Paper,
Graphic Canvas, Durable Backlit Film, Durable Banner, Matt Coated
Paper, Extra Matt Coated Paper, Opaque Paper, Hi Res Graphic Paper,
Prem Art Paper Embossed, Prem Art Paper Smooth, Hi Res Barrier
Paper, Scrim Banner, Uni Opaque Backlit Film, Roll-Up Film, Water
Res Art Canvas, Adhesive Matt Vinyl Stretch
Supported thickness 0.07mm to 0.8mm
Media size (Roll media) Width: 254mm (10") to 1118mm (44")
Length: 203mm (8") to 18m (709")
* Outer diameter of roll :150mm or less
* The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating
system or the applications.

Media size (Cut sheet) Width: 203mm (8") to 1118mm (44")

Length: 203mm (8") to 1600mm (63")
Printable area (Roll media) Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top, bottom and left and right margins.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Printable area (Cut sheet) Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin and
3-mm left and right margins.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 5-mm bottom margin and
(Roll media) 5-mm left and right margins.
Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin
(Cut sheet) and 5-mm left and right margins.
Borderless printing * Roll media only
width: 254mm(10"), 355.6mm(14"), 431.8mm(17"), 515mm, 594mm,
609.6mm(24"), 841mm, 914.4mm(36"), 1030mm, 1066.8mm(42")
Memory 384MB
Increase of memory: none
Firmware Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet, IEEE1394)
- Printer description language
GARO (Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation), HP-GL/2, HP-
RTL
Emulation None
Interface USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Network (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
IEEE1394 (option)
Operation panel LCD (160 X 128 dots), 12 keys, 5 LEDs
- Panel language
English
- Message language
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, Korean, Russianand
and Japanese
Printhead/Ink Tank type Printhead and separate ink tanks
Printhead PF-03
Structure: Integrated six-color assembly
Number of nozzles: 2,560 for each color
Ink tank PFI-301 BK/MBK/C/M/Y
PFI-701 BK/MBK/C/M/Y
Ink tank capacity: PFI-303 330 ml, PFI-703 700 ml
Detection functions (Cover Cover open/closed detection: Yes
system) Ink tank cover open/closed detection: Yes

1-13
 Chapter 1

Detection functions (Ink passage Ink tank presence/absence detection: Yes

system) Remaining ink level detection: Yes
Maintenance cartridge presence/absence detection: Yes
Used ink tank full detection: Yes
Valve open/closed detection: Yes
Detection functions (Carriage Printhead presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Carriage position detection: Yes
Carriage home position detection: Yes
Printhead fixer lever open/closed detection: Yes
Carriage temperature detection: Yes
Printhead height detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle backup feature: Yes
Ambient temperature/humidity detection: Yes
Detection functions (Paper path Paper presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Paper width detection: Yes
Skew detection: Yes
Paper release lever position detection: Yes
Remaining roll media detection: Yes
Feed roller rotation detection: Yes
Cutter positin detection: Yes
Operating noise Operating: Approx. 52dB (A) or less
Standby: Approx. 35dB (A) or less
Operating environment Temperature: 5 to 35 degrees centigrade
Humidity: 10% to 90%RH
Print quality guaranteed Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade
environment Humidity: 10% to 80%RH
Power supply 100-240 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption (Maximum) During printing: Max. 190 W
Power consumption In power save (sleep) mode:
100-120 VAC : 5W or less (When IEEE1394 board installed, 10W or
less)
220-240 VAC : 6W or less (When IEEE1394 board installed, 11W or
less)
During standby: 1 W or less
Printer unit dimensions 1893mm x 1269mm x 1144mm (with stand and wheeled output stacker)
(WxDxH)
Weight Approx. 147 kg (with stand and wheeled output stacker)

1.3.2 Product Specifications

0020-5439

iPF810

Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer (stand model)

Feeding system Roll media: Manual (front loading)
Cut sheet: Paper tray (front loading)
Feeding capacity - Roll media
1 roll madia/Outer diameter of roll: 150 mm or less
- Cut sheet
1 sheet
Delivery method Forward delivery, face up
Sheet delivery capability 1 sheet (using the outout stacker of the stand)
Cutter Automatic cross-cutter (round blade)

Type of media Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),
Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper,
Glossy Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Backlit Film, Backprint
Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Fine Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight
Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas Matte, Premium Coated Paper,
Graphic Canvas, Durable Backlit Film, Durable Banner, Matt Coated
Paper, Extra Matt Coated Paper, Opaque Paper, Hi Res Graphic Paper,
Prem Art Paper Embossed, Prem Art Paper Smooth, Hi Res Barrier
Paper, Scrim Banner, Uni Opaque Backlit Film, Roll-Up Film, Water
Res Art Canvas, Adhesive Matt Vinyl Stretch
Supported thickness 0.07mm to 0.8mm
Media size (Roll media) Width: 254mm (10") to 1118mm (44")
Length: 203mm (8") to 18m (709")
* Outer diameter of roll :150mm or less
* The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating
system or the applications.

Media size (Cut sheet) Width: 203mm (8") to 1118mm (44")

Length: 203mm (8") to 1600mm (63")

Printable area (Roll media) Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top, bottom and left and right margins.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Printable area (Cut sheet) Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin and
3-mm left and right margins.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 5-mm bottom margin and
(Roll media) 5-mm left and right margins.

1-14
 Chapter 1

Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin
(Cut sheet) and 5-mm left and right margins.
Borderless printing * Roll media only
width: 254mm(10"), 355.6mm(14"), 431.8mm(17"), 515mm, 594mm,
609.6mm(24"), 841mm, 914.4mm(36"), 1030mm, 1066.8mm(42")
Memory 384MB
Increase of memory: none
Firmware Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet, IEEE1394)
- Printer description language
GARO (Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation), HP-GL/2, HP-
RTL
Emulation None
Interface USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Network (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
IEEE1394 (option)
Operation panel LCD (160 X 128 dots), 12 keys, 5 LEDs
- Panel language
English
- Message language
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, Korean, Russianand
and Japanese
Printhead/Ink Tank type Printhead and separate ink tanks
Printhead PF-03
Structure: Integrated six-color assembly
Number of nozzles: 2,560 for each color
Ink tank PFI-301 BK/MBK/C/M/Y
PFI-701 BK/MBK/C/M/Y
Ink tank capacity: PFI-303 330 ml, PFI-703 700 ml
Detection functions (Cover Cover open/closed detection: Yes
system) Ink tank cover open/closed detection: Yes
Detection functions (Ink passage Ink tank presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Remaining ink level detection: Yes
Maintenance cartridge presence/absence detection: Yes
Used ink tank full detection: Yes
Valve open/closed detection: Yes
Detection functions (Carriage Printhead presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Carriage position detection: Yes
Carriage home position detection: Yes
Printhead fixer lever open/closed detection: Yes
Carriage temperature detection: Yes
Printhead height detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle backup feature: Yes
Ambient temperature/humidity detection: Yes
Detection functions (Paper path Paper presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Paper width detection: Yes
Skew detection: Yes
Paper release lever position detection: Yes
Remaining roll media detection: Yes
Feed roller rotation detection: Yes
Cutter positin detection: Yes
Operating noise Operating: Approx. 52dB (A) or less
Standby: Approx. 35dB (A) or less
Operating environment Temperature: 5 to 35 degrees centigrade
Humidity: 10% to 90%RH
Print quality guaranteed Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade
environment Humidity: 10% to 80%RH
Power supply 100-240 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption (Maximum) During printing: Max. 190 W
Power consumption In power save (sleep) mode:
100-120 VAC : 5W or less (When IEEE1394 board installed, 10W or
less)
220-240 VAC : 6W or less (When IEEE1394 board installed, 11W or
less)
During standby: 1 W or less
Printer unit dimensions 1893mm x 975mm x 1144mm (with stand and output stacker)
(WxDxH)
Weight Approx. 120 kg (with stand and output stacker)

1.4 Detailed Specifications

1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction

0020-5441

iPF810 / iPF820

1-15
 Chapter 1

T-1-7

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Plain Paper/ Plain Paper/Recycled Paper Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Recycled Paper
Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Plain Paper (High Quality) Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Plain Paper (High Grade) Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Economy Bond Paper Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Universal Bond Paper Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Standard Paper 1569B 80g Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Standard Paper 1570B 90g Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

1-16
 Chapter 1

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Coated Paper Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Heavyweight Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Premium Matte Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Recycled Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Colored Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Premium Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
LightWeight Coated Paper J80270 90g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
High Resolution Barrier Paper 180g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Matt Coated Paper 9171 120g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Extra Matt Coated Paper 7215 180g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Opaque Paper White 120g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Matt Coated Paper 140g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Photo Realistic Paper 210g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
LightWeight Coated Paper J80270 90g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

1-17
 Chapter 1

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper 2 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Heavywght SemiGlos Photo Paper 2 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Poster Semi-Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Premium RC Photo Luster , 10 mil Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Instant Dry Papers Glossy 200g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Instant Dry Papers Satin 200g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper High Glossy 250g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper Semi Matt 250g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper Satin 240g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper Pearl 260g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK

1-18
 Chapter 1

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Art Paper Fine Art Photo Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Textured Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Canvas Matte Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Block Print Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Watercolor Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Japanese Paper Washi Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Graphic Matte Canvas Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Art Paper Smooth 225g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Art Paper Embossed 225g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Art Paper Extra Smooth 250g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Water Resistant Paper Art Canvas Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Proofing Paper Proofing Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Professional Proof and Photo Glossy 195g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Professional Proof and Photo Semiglossy Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
195g High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Professional Proof and Photo Semigloss Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
255g High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Film Paper Backlit Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Backprint Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Outdoor Backlit (Durable Backlit Film/ Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
9578) High 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Pop-up Gloss Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
High 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Universal Opaque White Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
High 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK

1-19
 Chapter 1

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Matt Film Scrim Banner 370g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Paper High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Adhesive Matt Stretch Vinyl Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Thin Fabric Flame-Resistant Cloth Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Banner High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fabric Banner Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Thin Fabric Banner Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Synthetic Synthetic Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Paper High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Adhesive Synthetic Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Outdoor Polypropylene (Durable Banner) Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Adhesive Matt High Resolution Graphic Paper Self ADH Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Paper High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
CAD CAD Tracing Paper Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
CAD Clear Film Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
CAD Translucent Matte Film Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

1-20
 Chapter 1

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
SPECIAL SPECIAL 1 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 2 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 3 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 4 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 5 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 6 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 7 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 8 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 9 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 10 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

1-21
 Chapter 1

1.4.2 Interface Specifications

0013-8837

iPF810 / iPF820

a. USB (standard)
(1) Interface type
USB 2.0, Full speed (12 Mbits/sec), Hi-speed (480 Mbits/sec)
(2) Data transfer system
Control transfer
Bulk transfer
(3) Signal level
Compliant with the USB standard.
(4) Interface cable
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 5.0 m max.
Compliant with the USB standard.
Wire materials: AWG No.28, data wire pair (AWF: American Wire Gauge)
AWG No.20 to No.28, power distribution wire pair
(5) Interface connector
Printer side: Series B receptacle compliant with USB standard
Cable side: Series B plug compliant with USB standard

b. Network (standard)
(1) Interface type
Interface compliant with IEEE802.3
(2) Data transfer system
10Base-T/100Base-TX
(3) Signal level
Input: Threshold
10Base-T: Max. +585 mV, Min. +300 mV
100Base-TX: Turn-on +1000 mV diff pk-pk, Turn-off +200 mV diff pk-pk
Output:
10Base-T: +2.2 V to +2.8 V
100Base-TX: +0.95 to +1.05 V
(4) Interface cable
Category 5 (UTP or FTP) cable, 100 m or shorter
Compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B
(5) Interface connector
Printer side: Compliant with IEEE802.3, ANSI X3.263, ISO/IEC60603-7

c. IEEE1394 (option)
(1) Interface type
Interface compliant with IEEE1394-1995, P1394a (Version 2.0)
(2) Data transfer system
Asynchronous transfer
(3) Signal level
Input:
Differential input voltage:
During S100 settlement: +173 mV to +260 mV
During data reception: +142 mV to +260 mV
During S200 settlement: +171 mV to +262 mV
During data reception: +132 mV to +260 mV
During S400 settlement: +168 mV to +265 mV
During data reception: +118 mV to +260 mV
Output:
Differential output voltage: +172 mV to +265 mV
(4) Interface cable
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 4.5 m max.
Compliant with IEEE1394-1995 standard or P1394a (Version 2.0) standard
(5) Interface connector
Printer side: 6-pin connector (socket) compliant with IEEE1394 standard
Cable side: 6-pin connector (plug) compliant with IEEE1394 standard
Cable side: RJ-45 type compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B

1-22
 Chapter 1

1.5 Names and Functions of Components

1.5.1 Front
0020-5443

iPF820

[1] [8]

[2]

[9]

[12] [11]

[15] [12]
[17] [10]
[13]

[16]

[14]
[3] [17]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[20]
[3] [18]

[4]

[19]

[7]

[6]
F-1-21
[1] Upper cover
Open this cover to mount a printhead, load paper or remove per jammed jams inside the printer.
[2] Ejection guides
Allow printed material to be ejected. Open these guides to load rolls.
[3] Roll Holder slot
Set the roll holder into this guide slot.
[4] Roll holder
Set a roll on this holder.
[5] Cut sheet protective cloth
A cloth tray that receives cut sheet as they are ejected.
[6] Paper loading port
Insert a roll into this port to load.
[7] Holder stopper
Use this part to secure a roll to the roll holder.
[8] Ink tank cover
Open this cover to replace ink tanks.
[9] Operation panel
Operate the printer or view its status from this panel.
[10] Release lever
Releases the paper retainer. Pull up this lever to front to load paper.
[11] Maintenance cartridge
Collects inks that have been used for maintenance services, such as head cleaning.
[12] Carrying handle
The carrying handle is located on both left and right sides of the bottom. Allow a team of six persons to carry the printer.
[13] Maintenance cartridge cover
Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge.
[14] Stand
The base on which the printer mounts. The stand on wheels is easy to relocate.
[15] Stand L
The left leg of the stand
[16] Stand R
The right leg of the stand.
[17] Leg cover
Cover for stands L and R.
[18] Stoppers
Clamp the wheels of the stands. Be sure to release the stoppers when relocating the printer. Moving the printer with the stoppers locked could shave the wheels,
leaving scratches on the floor surface.
[19] Lower roll unit
The unit on which a second roll media is loaded.
[20] Lower roll unit lever

1-23
 Chapter 1

Hold this lever to pull out the lower roll unit.

1-24
 Chapter 1

1.5.2 Front
0020-5447

iPF810

[1] [9]

[2]

[10]

[13] [12]
[16]

[19] [5] [13]

[6]
[14]
[17]
[3] [18]
[11] [15]

[8] [7] [19]

[4]
[20]

F-1-22
[1] Upper cover
Open this cover to mount a printhead, load paper or remove per jammed jams inside the printer.
[2] Ejection guides
Allow printed material to be ejected. Open these guides to load rolls.
[3] Roll Holder slot
Set the roll holder into this guide slot.
[4] Roll holder
Set a roll on this holder.
[5] Ejection support
Prevents printed material from being caught on the roller holder or in the paper loading port.
[6] Output stacker
A cloth tray that receives paper as it is ejected.
[7] Paper loading port
Insert a roll into this port to load.
[8] Holder stopper
Use this part to secure a roll to the roll holder.
[9] Ink tank cover
Open this cover to replace ink tanks.
[10] Operation panel
Operate the printer or view its status from this panel.
[11] Release lever
Releases the paper retainer. Pull up this lever to front to load paper.
[12] Maintenance cartridge
Collects inks that have been used for maintenance services, such as head cleaning.
[13] Carrying handle
The carrying handle is located on both left and right sides of the bottom. Allow a team of six persons to carry the printer.
[14] Maintenance cartridge cover
Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge.
[15] Stand
The base on which the printer mounts. The stand on wheels is easy to relocate.
[16] Stand L
The left leg of the stand.
[17] Stand R
The right leg of the stand.
[18] Stand upper stay
Supports stands L and R. Mount a media take-up unit (option) on this stay.
[19] Leg cover
Cover for stands L and R.
[20] Stoppers
Clamp the wheels of the stands. Be sure to release the stoppers when relocating the printer. Moving the printer with the stoppers locked could shave the wheels,
leaving scratches on the floor surface.

1-25
 Chapter 1

1.5.3 Rear
0020-5448

iPF820

[3] [2] [1]

[4] [8]

[7]

[5]

[6]

F-1-23
[1] Expansion board slot
Mount an IEEE1394 (FireWire) Expansion board (option) into this slot.
[2] Ethernet connector
Insert an Ethernet cable into this connector. A lamp will turn on if the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the printer is ready to communicate.
[3] USB port
Insert a USB cable into this port. Hi-Speed USB-ready.
[4] Manual pocket
Have the printer manual stowed in this pocket.
[5] Power connector
Insert the power cord into this connector.
[6] Lower roll unit connector
Insert the lower roll unit cable into this connector.
[7] Carrying handle
The carrying handle is located on both left and right sides of the bottom. Allow a team of six persons to carry the printer.
[8] Accessory pocket
Have assembly tools, roller holder attachments and so on stowed in this pocket.

1-26
 Chapter 1

1.5.4 Rear
0020-5451

iPF810

[3] [2] [1]

[4] [8]

[5]

[7]

[6]

F-1-24
[1] Expansion board slot
Mount an IEEE1394 (FireWire) Expansion board (option) into this slot.
[2] Ethernet connector
Insert an Ethernet cable into this connector. A lamp will turn on if the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the printer is ready to communicate.
[3] USB port
Insert a USB cable into this port. Hi-Speed USB-ready.
[4] Manual pocket
Have the printer manual stowed in this pocket.
[5] Media take-up unit connector
Insert the cable a media take-up unit (option) into this connector.
[6] Power Supply Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
[7] Carrying handle
The carrying handle is located on both left and right sides of the bottom. Allow a team of six persons to carry the printer.
[8] Accessory pocket
Have assembly tools, roller holder attachments and so on stowed in this pocket.

1-27
 Chapter 1

1.5.5 Top Cover (Inside)

0020-5454

iPF810 / iPF820

[10]
[9] [8]
[1]

[13]
[3]

[11]
[4]

[2]

[12]
[7]
[5] [6]
F-1-25
[1] Upper cover roller
Allows paper to be ejected by suppressing its loosing.
[2] Registration line
Load paper to fit to this line.
[3] Carriage
Drives the printhead.
[4] Carriage shaft
The part through which the carriage travels.
[5] Paper retainer
A principal part for feeding paper, the paper retainer holds paper in position.
[6] Platen
The part on which the printhead travels to perform printing. Suction holes on its surface keep the paper from loosening during travel.
[7] Borderless printing ink reservoir
Receives inks overflowing the outside of the paper during borderless printing.
[8] Cleaner brush
Sweeps off paper dust from the platen surface when cleaning the inside of the upper cover.
[9] Cutter rail
The part the cutter unit traverses to cut paper.
[10] Cutter unit
A round cutter for cutting paper automatically.
[11] Linear scale
A principal part for detecting the location of the carriage. Be careful never to touch the linear scale when cleaning the inside of the upper cover or removing paper
dust.
[12] Switch
Set this switch to the circle position to perform borderless printing.
[13] Ink tube stabilizer
Secures the ink tubes.

1-28
 Chapter 1

1.5.6 Carriage
0020-5456

iPF810 / iPF820

[2] [1]

[5]
[3] [4]
F-1-26
[1] Printhead fixer cover
Clamps the printhead.
[2] Printhead
A principal part that houses nozzles.
[3] Printhead fixer lever
Locks the printhead fixer cover.
[4] Shaft cleaner
Keeps the carriage shaft clean.
[5] Slant adjustment lever
Makes fine-adjustments with the misregistration of ruled lines printed.

1.5.7 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

0020-5457

iPF810 / iPF820

[5]

[1]
A
[2] A
[4]
[3]

M
Y

MB
K

BK

F-1-27
[1] Ink tank
Ink-specific cartridge.
[2] Ink tank lock lever
Locks and thus protects the ink tank. Move this lever up and down to replace the ink tank. To open, raise the stopper of the lever until it won't go farther and then
push it to the front. To close, depress the stopper until it clicks.
[3] Ink lamp (red)
Indicates the status of the ink tank when the ink tank cover is opened, as follows:
- On
An ink tank is properly loaded.
- Off
No ink tank is loaded, or the remaining ink sensor is disabled.
- Slow blinking
Low on the inks.
- Fast blinking
Inks are out.
[4] Ink color label
Load an ink tank to meet the color and name of the label.
[5] Ink set
Ink tanks that can be used with this printer are labeled [A] on their side, which is printed in a white letter enclosed in a black circle.

1-29
 Chapter 1

1.6 Basic Operation

1.6.1 Operation Panel

0012-6277

iPF810 / iPF820

This section explains the functions of the buttons and the meanings of the LEDs on the operation panel.

[2] [1] [19] [18] [17] [16]

[3]

[5] [4]

[15]

[14]

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

F-1-28
[1] Message lamp
On: Indicates that a warning message is on display.
Blinking: Indicates that an error message is on display.
Off: The printer is normal or is turned off.
[2] Data lamp
Blinking: Indicates that a print job is being received or processed if the printer is printing, or that a print job has paused or firmware data is being if the printer is
not printing.
Off: No print job is available.
[3] Online button
Toggles the printer mode between online and offline.
On: Online mode.
Blinking: Emerging from sleep mode.
Off: Offline mode.
[4] Cut sheet lamp (green)
On: Either the paper tray or paper tray front loading port is selected as a paper source.
Off: Roll media are selected as a paper source.
[5] Roll media lamp (green)
On: Roll media are selected as a paper source.
Off: Either the paper tray or paper tray front loading port is selected as a paper source.
[6] Menu button
Displays the printer main menu.
[7] Paper source button
Selects a paper source. Each time this button is pressed, the paper source toggles between roll media (roll media source) and cut sheet (paper tray or paper tray
front loading port), with the paper source selector lamp illuminating.
[8] Color labels
Represent ink tank colors in association with the remaining ink levels shown in the display.
[9] Display
Displays the printer menu, status or messages.
[10] HDD lamp (Green)
On: Indicates the printer is accessing the hard disk.
Off: Indicates the printer is not accessing the hard disk.
[11] button
Press this button when the printer is in offline mode to manually feed roll media.
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the next item or setting.
[12] button
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the menu at the lower level.
If [NEXT -->] on display, the guidance screen can be moved forward.
[13] Load/Eject button
Guidance offers a visual clue to loading (replacing)/removing paper. Press this button when no paper is loaded to view instructions on how to load (replace) paper
in the display; press the button when paper is loaded to view instructions on how to remove the paper.
[14] Stop button
Press for longer than 1 second to cancel the job or ink drying process in progress.
If cut sheet loading guidance or the like is on display, hold this button for longer than 1 second to stop the guidance.
[15] Power button
Turns the printer on and off.
[16] Information button
Displays the printer submenu. Each time this button is pressed, information about the inks and paper is displayed.
Hold this button depressed for 3 seconds to execute printhead cleaning ([Head Cleaning A]).
[17] OK button
Press to set or set or execute a menu choice when the printer is in menu mode.
Press this button in any other situation to transition to the next screen as directed by a message appearing in the display.
[18] button
Press this button when the printer is in offline mode to manually feed roll media in the direction opposite to that of ejection.
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the last item or setting.
[19] button
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the menu at the upper level.
The button is also used from one position to the next when entering a numeric value.
If [<-- STOP] is on display, the guidance screen can be paused.
If [<-- BACK] on display, the guidance screen can be moved backward.

1-30
 Chapter 1

1.6.2 Main Menu

0020-5459

iPF810

The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection position of each nozzle and head cleaning, a menu
related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying time, and a menu related to parameters such as a message language.
1. Main menu operations
a) How to enter the Main menu
To enter the Main menu, press the [Menu] button on the operation panel.

b) How to exit the Main menu

To exit the Main menu, press the [Online] button.

c) Buttons used with the Main menu

- Selecting menus and parameters: [ ] or [ ] button
- Going to the next lower-level menu: [ ] button
- Going to the next higher-level menu: [ ] button
- Determining a selected menu or parameter: [OK] button

1-31
 Chapter 1

2. Main Menu
The structure of the main menu is as follows.
T-1-8

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Paper Cut](*1) [No]*
[Yes]
[Rep. Ink Tank] [No]*
[Yes]
[Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]*
[Head Cleaning B]
[Auto Feed](*13) [No]*
[Yes]
[Take-up Reel](*10) [Disable]*
[Enable]
[Media Menu] [Cut Sheet Type] [Plain Paper](*5)
[Plain Paper HQ](*5)
[Plain Paper HG](*5)
[Recycled Coated](*5)
[Coated Paper](*5)
[HW Coated](*5)
[Ex HW Coated](*5)
[Premium MatteP](*5)
[Glossy Photo](*5)
[Semi-Gl Photo](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo2](*5)
[Poster Semi-Gl](*5)
[Syn. Paper](*5)
[Adh. Syn. Paper](*5)
[Backlit Film](*5)
[Backprint Film](*5)
[Flame-Res.Cloth](*5)
[Fabric Banner](*5)
[ThinFab.Banner2](*5)
[Proofing Paper](*5)
[News Proof 1](*5)
[News Proof 2](*5)
[FineArt Photo](*5)
[FneArt HW Photo](*5)

1-32
 Chapter 1

T-1-9

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Media Menu] [Cas Paper Type] [FineArt Txtr](*5)
[FineArt Wtrclr](*5)
[FineArtBlockP](*5)
[Canvas Matte2](*5)
[JPN Paper Washi](*5)
[Colored Coated](*5)
[CAD Trace Paper](*5)
[CAD Matte Film](*5)
[CAD Clear Film](*5)
[Special #] # Here, the
number is 1 to 10 (*5)
[Roll Media Type] [Plain Paper](*5)
[Plain Paper HQ](*5)
[Plain Paper HG](*5)
[Recycled Coated](*5)
[Coated Paper](*5)
[HW Coated](*5)
[Ex HW Coated](*5)
[Premium MatteP](*5)
[Glossy Photo](*5)
[Semi-Gl Photo](*5)
[HW Glossy Photo2](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo2](*5)
[Poster Semi-Gl](*5)
[Syn. Paper](*5)
[Adh. Syn. Paper](*5)
[Backlit Film](*5)
[Backprint Film](*5)
[Flame-Res.Cloth](*5)
[Fabric Banner](*5)
[ThinFab.Banner2](*5)

1-33
 Chapter 1

T-1-10

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Media Menu] [Roll Media Type] [Proofing Paper](*5)
[News Proof 1](*5)
[News Proof 2](*5)
[FineArt Photo](*5)
[FneArt HW Photo](*5)
[FineArt Txtr](*5)
[FineArt Wtrclr](*5)
[FineArtBlockP](*5)
[Canvas Matte2](*5)
[JPN Paper Washi](*5)
[Colored Coated](*5)
[CAD Trace Paper](*5)
[CAD Matte Film](*5)
[CAD Clear Film](*5)
[Special #] # Here, the
number is 1 to 10 (*5)
[Roll Length Set](*1, *2) [### m](*16)
[### feet](*16)
[Chk Remain.Roll] [Off]*
[On]
[Paper Details] (The paper type is displayed [Roll DryingTime] [Off]
here.) (*5) [30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[3 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[Scan Wait Time] [Off]
[1 sec.]
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[9 sec.]
[Feed Priority] [Automatic]*
[Band Joint]
[Print Length]
[Adjust Length A] -0.70% - 0.00%* - 0.70%
[Adjust Length B] -0.70% - 0.00%* - 0.70%
[Head Height] [Automatic]*
[Highest]
[High]
[Standard]
[Low]
[Lowest]

1-34
 Chapter 1

T-1-11

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Paper Details] (The paper type is [Skew Check Lv.] [Standard]
displayed here.) (*5) [Loose]
[Off]
[VacuumStrngth] [Automatic]*
[Strongest]
[Strong]
[Standard]
[Weak]
[Weakest]
[Width Detection] [Off]
[On]
[NearEnd RollMrgn] [3mm]
[20mm]
[Cut Speed] [Fast]
[Standard]
[Slow]
[Trim Edge First] [Automatic]
[Off]
[On]
[Cutting Mode] [Automatic]
[Eject]
[Manual]
[Bordless Margin] [Automatic]
[Fixed]
[CutDustReduct.] [Off]
[On]
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] [3mm]
[20mm]
[Return Defaults] [No]
[Yes]
[Job Management] [Print Job] [Job List] (Choose a print job) [Delete]
[Preempt Jobs]
[Stored Job] [Mailbox List] (Enter a password if one [Job List] [Print]
has been set.) [Delete]
[Print Job List] [No]
[Yes]
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name]
about the latest three print [User Name]
jobs.)
[Page Count]
[Job Status] [OK]
[CANCELED]
[Print Start Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm]
[Print End Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm]
[Print Time] [xxx sec.]
[Print Size] [xxxxxxxxsq.mm]
[Media Type]
[Interface] [USB]
[Network]
[IEEE1394]
[Ink Consumed] [xx.x ml]
[HDD Information] [HDDSpace]: xx.xGB

1-35
 Chapter 1

T-1-12

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[GL2 Settings] [Color Mode] [Monochrome]
[Color(CAD)1]
[Color(CAD)2]
[Color(CAD)3]
[Color(CAD)4]
[Color(CAD)5]
[Color(CAD)6]
[Print Quality] [Draft]
[Standard]*
[High]
[Print (Economy)] [Off]*
[On]
[Input Resolution] [600dpi]*
[300dpi]
[Paper Source] [Automatic]*
[Roll Paper]
[Cut Sheet]
[Conserve Paper] [Off]*
[On]
[Line Cap] [Software]*
[Rounded]
[Smoothing] [Software]*
[Smooth]
[Line Width] [1dot]
[2dot]
[3dot]
[4dot]*
[5dot]
[6dot]
[7dot]
[ThickenFineLines] [Off]*
[On]
[AdjustFaintLines] [Off]
[On]*
[Auto Rotate] [Off]
[On]*
[Nesting] [Use Nesting] [Off]*
[On]
[Nesting WaitTime] 1-11min.
[Cut Lines] [Off]*
[On]
[On-the-Fly] [Off]*
[On]

1-36
 Chapter 1

T-1-13

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Adjust Printer] [Auto Head Adj.] [Standard Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Advanced Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Auto Print] [Off]
[On]*
[Manual Head Adj](*12) [No]
[Yes]
[Auto Band Adj.] [Standard Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Advanced Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Manual Band Adj] [No]
[Yes]
[Adjust Length](*3) [A:High] [No]
[Yes]
[B:Standard/Draft] [No]
[Yes]
[Head Inc. Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Interface Setup] [EOP Timer] [10 sec.]
[30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[2 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]*
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[TCP/IP] [IP Mode] [Automatic]
[Manual]*
[Protocol](*4) [DHCP] [On]
[Off]*

1-37
 Chapter 1

T-1-14

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Interface Setup] [TCP/IP] [Protocol](*4) [BOOTP] [On]
[Off]*
[RARP] [On]
[Off]*
[IP Setting](*14) [IP Address] 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
[Subnet Mask] 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
[Default G/W] 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
[NetWare] [NetWare] [On]
[Off]*
[Frame Type](*6) [Auto Detect]
[Ethernet 2]
[Ethernet 802.2]*
[Ethernet 802.3]
[Ethernet SNAP]
[Print Service](*6) [BinderyPServer]
[RPrinter]
[NDSPServer]*
[NPrinter]
[AppleTalk] [On]
[Off]*
[Ethernet Driver] [Auto Detect] [On]*
[Off]
[Comm.Mode](*7) [Half Duplex]*
[Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type](*7) [10 Base-T]*
[100 Base-TX]
[Spanning Tree] [Not Use]*
[Use]
[MAC Address] 000085XXXXXX
[Ext.Interface] [No]*
[IEEE1394]
[Init. Settings] [No]*
[Yes]
[Maintenance] [Maint. cart.] [No]
[Yes]

1-38
 Chapter 1

T-1-15

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Maintenance] [Replace P.head] [No]
[Yes]
[Repl. S. Cleaner] [No]
[Yes]
[Move Printer] [Level 1]*
[Level 2]
[Level 3]
[System Setup] [Warning] [Buzzer] [Off]
[On]*
[Detect Mismatch] [Pause]
[Warning]
[None]*
[Skip Take-Up Err(*10) [Off]*
[On]
[Keep Media Size] [Off]*
[On]
[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection 1] [ISO A3+]*
[13"x19"(Super B)]
[Sht Selection 2] [ISO B1]*
[28"x40"(ANSI F)]
[Noz. Check Freq.] [Off]
[1 page]
[10 pages]
[Automatic]*
[CarriageScanWdth] [Automatic]*
[Fixed]
[Sleep Timer] [5 min.]*
[10 min.]
[15 min.]
[20 min.]
[30 min.]
[40 min.]
[50 min.]
[60 min.]
[240 min.]

1-39
 Chapter 1

T-1-16

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[System Setup] [Length Unit] [meter]*
[feet/inch]
[Time Zone] [0: London (GMT)]
[+1: Paris, Rome]
[+2: Athens, Cairo]
[+3: Moscow]
[+4: Eerevan, Baku]
[+5: Islamabad]
[+6: Dacca]
[+7: Bangkok]
[+8: Hong Kong]
[+9: Tokyo, Seoul]
[+10: Canberra]
[+11: NewCaledonia]
[+12: Wellington]
[-12: Eniwetok]
[-11: Midway is.]
[-10: Hawaii (AHST)]
[-9: Alaska (AKST)]
[-8: Oregon (PST)]
[-7: Arizona (MST)]
[-6: Texas (CST)]
[-5: NewYork (EST)]
[-4: Santiago]
[-3: Buenos Aires]
[-2: ]
[-1: Cape Verde]
[Date Format] [yyyy/mm/dd]*
[dd/mm/yyyy]
[mm/dd/yyyy]
[Date & Time] [Date] [yyyy/mm/dd](*8)
[Time] [hh:mm]

1-40
 Chapter 1

T-1-17

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[System Setup] [Language] [Japanese]*
[English]
[Francais]
[Italiano]
[Deutsch]
[Espanol]
[Pyccknn]
[Chinese]
[Korea]
[Contrast Adj.] -4 to 4
[Reset PaprSetngs] [No]
[Yes]
[Erase HDD Data] [High Speed] [No]
[Yes]
[Secure High Spd.] [No]
[Yes]
[Secure] [No]
[Yes]
[Output Method] [Print]*
[Print(auto delete)]
[Save in mail box]
[Save beforePrint] [Off]*
[On]
[Save in Comm.Box] [Off]
[On]*
[Test Print] [Status Print] [No]
[Yes]
[Media Details] [No]
[Yes]
[Print Job Log] [No]
[Yes]
[Menu Map] [No]
[Yes]
[Nozzle Check] [No]
[Yes]
[Information] [System Info]
[Error Log] 1.xxxxxxxx-xxxx
2.xxxxxxxx-xxxx

*1: Displayed if a roll is loaded.

*2: Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
*3: Displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.
*4: Only these menus are displayed during printing.
*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Media Guide. The media type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well
as on the Control Panel is updated when you install Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using Media
Configuration Tool.
*6: Available only if Auto Detect is Off.
*7: Available only if NetWare is On.
*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*10: Displayed if the Media Take-up Unit is attached.
*12: Displayed if paper is loaded in the tray.
*13: Available if: Take-up Reel is Enable , roll paper is loaded, and you have not executed Auto Feed for the loaded roll.
*14: This menu is only displayed during printing.
*16: Not displayed if a roll or a sheet has been fed.

1-41
 Chapter 1

3. Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
T-1-18

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Menu Durng Prtng] [Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]
[Head Cleaning B]
[Fine Band Adj.] -5 to 5
[Information] [System Info]
[Error Log] 1.xxxxxxxx-xxxx
2.xxxxxxxx-xxxx

1-42
 Chapter 1

4. Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.
T-1-19

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Paper Cut] Displayed if a roll is loaded.
Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. The paper will be fed, if necessary, so that the
sheet is at least 10 cm (39.4 in.)long after the cut. The paper will not be cut if there is not enough
paper left to feed the paper this much.
[Rep. Ink Tank] When replacing the Ink Tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Head Cleaning] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head
Cleaning A.
[Auto Feed] This command is available only if Take-up Reel is set to Enable. Choose Yes to advance roll
paper automatically on the Rewind Spool, up to the fastening position.
[Take-up Reel] Choose Enable to use the Media Take-up Unit.
[Media Menu] Specify the type and size of paper.
[Paper Details] Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and borderless printing
options.
[Job Management] Manage print jobs on the printer's hard disk.
[GL2 Settings] Make settings for making prints using GL2.
[Adjust Printer] Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern.
[Interface Setup] Configure the EOP timer and network settings.
[Maintenance] Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to move the printer.
[System Setup] Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display language.
[Test Print] Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.
Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details.
Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and size, amount
of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is general, not specific in nature.)
Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.
Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
[Information] Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs.

[Media Menu]
T-1-20

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Cut Sheet Type] Choose the type of sheets.
[Roll Media Type] Choose the type of roll.
[Roll Length Set] Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed in meters
or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit.

[Chk Remain.Roll] Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can
be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. ChooseOff if you prefer not to print the
barcode.

1-43
 Chapter 1

[Paper Details]
T-1-21

Setting Item Description, Instructions

(The paper type is displayed [Roll DryingTime] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
here.) [Scan Wait Time] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in
consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a
wait time.
[Feed Priority] Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select Automatic. Choose Print Length if you
prefer to feed the paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing Print Length may result
in slight banding in the direction of Carriage scanning.
[Adjust Length] Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length.
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper.
Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the discrepancy that you measured (as
a percentage).
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by setting the adjustment value toward
+. For paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by setting the adjustment value
toward -.
[Head Height] Adjust the Printhead height.
[Skew Check Lv.] If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper that has an irregular width,
choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection.
However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling
may occur.
[VacuumStrngth] Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.
[Width Detection] Make this setting when the print size is different from the media size, for example, when you
want to make a print within a frame.
When you select [Off], the paper width is not detected.
[NearEnd RollMrgn] Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality
at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 5mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.
[Cut Speed] Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive
from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.
[Trim Edge First] If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
[Cutting Mode] Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed cutter.
Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after printing. If you choose Manual, the
paper will not be cut after printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.
Choose Eject if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing, as when
waiting for ink to dry.
[Bordless Margin] Adjust the margin during borderless printing.
Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the paper width and configure the
margin settings for borderless printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is
selected, choose Fixed. In this case, the paper width is not detected automatically, and the
document is printed without borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.
[CutDustReduct.] Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting film and similar media by
printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after
cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if
you use adhesive paper.
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading
edge.
Note that if you choose 5mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge.
[Return Defaults] Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default values.

1-44
 Chapter 1

[Job Management]
T-1-22

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Print Job] [Job List] (Choose a print [Delete] Delete the current job or queued jobs.
job) [Preempt Jobs] Print the job first after the current print job is
finished printing.
[Stored Job] [Mailbox List] (Enter a password [Job List]-[Print] Prints a saved job.
if one has been [Job List]-[Delete] Deletes a saved job.
set.)
[Job List]-[Print] Prints a list of saved jobs.
[Job Log] (Choose from [Document Name] Displays the name of the document in the most
information about recently printed job.
the latest three [User Name] Displays the name of the user who has transmitted
print jobs.) the job.
[Page Count] Displays the number of sheets of the job.
[Job Status] Displays the result of processing of the job.
[Print Start Time] Displays the time at which the job started printing.
[Print End Time] Displays the time at which the job finished
printing.
[Print Time] Displays the time spent printing the job.
[Print Size] Displays the size of the paper used for printing the
job.
[Media Type] Displays the type of the paper used for printing the
job.
[Interface] Displays the interface of the job.
[Ink Consumed] Displays the amount of ink consumed for printing
the job.
[HDD [HDDSpace] Displays the size of free hard disk space on the
Information] printer.

1-45
 Chapter 1

[GL2 Settings]
T-1-23

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Color Mode] [Monochrome] Print by the monochrome.
[Color(CAD)1] Print by the standard color.
[Color(CAD)2] Print by the bright color.
[Color(CAD)3] Print by the color emulated the Canon BJ-W3000/W3050.
[Color(CAD)4] Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 500/800.
[Color(CAD)5] Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 1000.
[Color(CAD)6] Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 4000/4050.
[Print Quality] Select the print quality.
[Print (Economy)] Prints with a lower grade of print than normal, but with less ink consumption. Select [ON] to
economize on inks.
[Input Resolution] Choose the printer input resolution from between [600dpi] and [300dpi].
[Paper Source] Select how to feed paper for printing on the HP-GL/2.
[Conserve Paper] Prints by economizing on paper.
[Line Cap] Choose the shape of the end of a line from between [Software] and [Rounded].
[Smoothing] Choose whether to draw an arc with a smooth curve or with a polygon.
[Line Width] Select the width of each line to print for data that does not have a line width specified. The line
width is expressed in increments of 300 dpi.
[ThickenFineLines] Select [On] to print thin lines clearly.
[AdjustFaintLines] If thin lines print in a tint of color varied from other patterns, selecting [Off] may provide the
print result as intended, though the thin lines may print, interrupted, depending on the color.
[Auto Rotate] If a document has its long side shorter than the roll width, the page rotates by 90 degrees
automatically to economize on paper. If a document contains horizontally long data such that
it has its long side longer than the roll width and its short side shorter than the roll width, the
page rotates 90 degrees to print within the boundaries of the paper.
HP RTL cannot rotate.
[Nesting] [Use Nesting] Select [On] to print pages when they are tiled fully to the roll width, instead of printing them
one by one.
[Nesting WaitTime] Set the time to elapse before printing.
[Cut Lines] Select [On] to print perforated lines between pages.
[On-the-Fly] In printing data consisting solely of HP RTL, if the data is slow to print, select [On] to expedite
the time at which the data starts printing. Verify the print result to make sure that images are
not chipped in this case.

1-46
 Chapter 1

[Adjust Printer]
T-1-24

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Auto Head Adj.] [Standard Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of
Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction.
[Advanced Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of
Printhead alignment relative to the nozzle and printing direction.
[Auto Print] Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the Advanced Adj. operations after you
replace the Printhead.
[Manual Head Ad] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing
direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.
[Auto Band Adj.] [Standard Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic
adjustment of the feed amount.
[Advanced Adj.] Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon paper, or paper for purposes
other than checking output.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic
adjustment of the feed amount. Note that this function takes more time and requires more ink
than Standard Adj.

[Manual Head Adj] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing
direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.
[Adjust Length] [A:High] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after
[B:Standard/Draft] which you can enter the amount of adjustment.

[Head Inc. Adj.] Select [Yes] to print an adjustment pattern for adjusting the inclination of the printhead.

1-47
 Chapter 1

[Interface Setup]
T-1-25

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[EOP Timer] Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that
cannot be received by the printer.
[TCP/IP] [TCP/IP] Specify the TCP/IP protocol settings. To apply your changes,
choose Register Setting.
[IP Mode] Choose whether the printer IP address is configured
automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.
[Protocol] [DHCP] Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address
[BOOTP] automatically.

[RARP]
[IP Setting] [IP Address] Specify the printer network information when using a static IP
[Subnet Mask] address.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the
[Default G/W] network subnet mask and default gateway.
[NetWare] [NetWare] Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes, choose
Register Setting.
[Frame Type] Specify the frame type to use.
[Print Service] Choose the print service.
[AppleTalk] Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To apply your
changes, choose Register Setting.
[Ethernet Driver] [Auto Detect] Specify the communication method. To apply your changes,
choose Register Setting.
Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN
communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings values of
Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.
[Comm.Mode] Choose the LAN communication method.
[Ethernet Type] Choose the LAN transfer rate.
[Spanning Tree] Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the
LAN.
[MAC Address] Displays the MAC address.
[Ext.Interface] When installing the expansion interface board, choose whether
the expansion interface board is used.
[Init. Settings] A confirmation message is displayed if you press the button.
Choose [OK] to restore the network settings to the default values.

[Maintenance]
T-1-26

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Maint. cart.] When exchanging the maintenance cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the
screen.
[Replace P.head] Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is
low.
When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

[Repl. S. Cleaner] When replacing the Shaft Cleaner, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Move Printer] When transferring the printer to another location, choose the level of transfer and follow the
instructions on the screen.

1-48
 Chapter 1

[System Setup]
T-1-27

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Warning] [Buzzer] Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.
[Detect Mismatch] Choose Warning for notification (display of a warning message) during printing if the paper
type specified in the printer menu does not match the paper type in the printer driver. Choose
None to continue print without notification. Choose Pause to have printing paused under these
circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing by pressing the Online button.
[Skip Take-Up Err] Choose On to continue with printing even if an error occurs with the Media Take-up Unit.
Choose Off to have the printer pause before printing if a rewinding error occurs.
[Keep Media Size] Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing instead of other settings. The
margin setting of the printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver
if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the margin from being printed.
Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the margin setting of the printer
driver is smaller than that of the printer driver, text or images will not be cut off. However, this
requires longer paper because the actual margin will be equal to the margin setting of the printer
driver plus the margin setting of the printer menu.

[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection 1] Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO A3+] or [13"x19"(Super B)], when the detected size
of the cut sheet is between these sizes.
[Sht Selection 2] Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO B1] or [28"x40"(ANSI F)], when the detected size
of the cut sheet is between these sizes.
[Noz. Check Freq.] Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging. Choose 1 page to check once per
printed page. Choose 10 pages to check once per ten printed pages. Choose Automatic to have
the printer automatically adjust the timing for checks based on the frequency of nozzle use.
[CarriageScanWdth] Set the scan width of the carriage for printing. Select [Automatic] to move the carriage to meet
the width of the loaded paper. Selecting [Fixed] will reduce stains on the back of the paper but
at the cost of a somewhat longer print time.
[Sleep Timer] Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.
[Length Unit] Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed. You can switch the unit
displayed for Roll Length Set and the remaining paper amount displayed in the submenu.
[Time Zone] Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the
difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
[Date Format] Specify the date format.
[Date & Time] [Date] Set the current date.
[Time] Set the current time.
[Language] Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
[Contrast Adj.] Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
[Reset PaprSetngs] Restores settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the factory default
values.
[Erase HDD Data] [High Speed] Delete the file management information of the saved data in the HDD.
[Secure High Spd.] Overwrite the random data in the whole of the hard disk drive.
[Secure] Overwrite 00 and FF and random data in the whole of the hard disk drive once at a time.
Execute the verify check whether the data has written correctly to the hard disk drive.
[Output Method] [Print] Choose how to print.
[Print(auto delete)] Select [Print] to perform normal printing. Select [Print (Auto delete)], print data and remove it
[Save in mail box] from the hard disk. Select [Save in mail box] to only save data to the box, without printing it.

[Save beforePrint] Select [On] to start printing data when its save is complete.
[Save in Comm.Box] Select [Off] to print data without saving it to the common box.

1-49
 Chapter 1

[Information]
T-1-28

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[System Info] [Version] [Firmware] Displays the version of the printer and firmware.
[Boot] Displays the version of the boot ROM.
[MIT] Displays the version of the MIT database format.
[s/n] Displays the printer's serial number.
[MAC] Displays the MAC address of the printer.
[IP] Displays the printer IP address.
[Error Log] [########-####] Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).

1-50
 Chapter 1

1.6.3 Main Menu

0020-5468

iPF820

The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection position of each nozzle and head cleaning, a menu
related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying time, and a menu related to parameters such as a message language.
1. Main menu operations
a) How to enter the Main menu
To enter the Main menu, press the [Menu] button on the operation panel.

b) How to exit the Main menu

To exit the Main menu, press the [Online] button.

c) Buttons used with the Main menu

- Selecting menus and parameters: [ ] or [ ] button
- Going to the next lower-level menu: [ ] button
- Going to the next higher-level menu: [ ] button
- Determining a selected menu or parameter: [OK] button

1-51
 Chapter 1

2. Main Menu
The structure of the main menu is as follows.
T-1-29

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Paper Cut](*1) [No]*
[Yes]
[Rep. Ink Tank] [No]*
[Yes]
[Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]*
[Head Cleaning B]
[Media Menu] [Cut Sheet Type] [Plain Paper](*5)
[Plain Paper HQ](*5)
[Plain Paper HG](*5)
[Recycled Coated](*5)
[Coated Paper](*5)
[HW Coated](*5)
[Ex HW Coated](*5)
[Premium MatteP](*5)
[Glossy Photo](*5)
[Semi-Gl Photo](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo2](*5)
[Poster Semi-Gl](*5)
[Syn. Paper](*5)
[Adh. Syn. Paper](*5)
[Backlit Film](*5)
[Backprint Film](*5)
[Flame-Res.Cloth](*5)
[Fabric Banner](*5)
[ThinFab.Banner2](*5)
[Proofing Paper](*5)
[News Proof 1](*5)
[News Proof 2](*5)
[FineArt Photo](*5)
[FneArt HW Photo](*5)

1-52
 Chapter 1

T-1-30

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Media Menu] [Cas Paper Type] [FineArt Txtr](*5)
[FineArt Wtrclr](*5)
[FineArtBlockP](*5)
[Canvas Matte2](*5)
[JPN Paper Washi](*5)
[Colored Coated](*5)
[CAD Trace Paper](*5)
[CAD Matte Film](*5)
[CAD Clear Film](*5)
[Special #] # Here, the
number is 1 to 10 (*5)
[Roll1(Uppr) Type]/[Roll2 [Plain Paper](*5)
(Lwr) Type](*1, *2) [Plain Paper HQ](*5)
[Plain Paper HG](*5)
[Recycled Coated](*5)
[Coated Paper](*5)
[HW Coated](*5)
[Ex HW Coated](*5)
[Premium MatteP](*5)
[Glossy Photo](*5)
[Semi-Gl Photo](*5)
[HW Glossy Photo2](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo2](*5)
[Poster Semi-Gl](*5)
[Syn. Paper](*5)
[Adh. Syn. Paper](*5)
[Backlit Film](*5)
[Backprint Film](*5)
[Flame-Res.Cloth](*5)
[Fabric Banner](*5)
[ThinFab.Banner2](*5)

1-53
 Chapter 1

T-1-31

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Media Menu] [Roll1(Uppr) Type]/[Roll2 [Proofing Paper](*5)
(Lwr) Type](*1, *2) [News Proof 1](*5)
[News Proof 2](*5)
[FineArt Photo](*5)
[FneArt HW Photo](*5)
[FineArt Txtr](*5)
[FineArt Wtrclr](*5)
[FineArtBlockP](*5)
[Canvas Matte2](*5)
[JPN Paper Washi](*5)
[Colored Coated](*5)
[CAD Trace Paper](*5)
[CAD Matte Film](*5)
[CAD Clear Film](*5)
[Special #] # Here, the
number is 1 to 10 (*5)
[Roll1(Uppr)Lngth]/ [### m](*16)
[Roll2(Lwr) Lngth](*1, *2) [### feet](*16)

[Chk Remain.Roll] [Off]*

[On]
[Paper Details] (The paper type is displayed [Roll DryingTime] [Off]
here.) (*5) [30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[3 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[Scan Wait Time] [Off]
[1 sec.]
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[9 sec.]
[Feed Priority] [Automatic]*
[Band Joint]
[Print Length]
[Adjust Length A] -0.70% - 0.00%* - 0.70%
[Adjust Length B] -0.70% - 0.00%* - 0.70%
[Head Height] [Automatic]*
[Highest]
[High]
[Standard]
[Low]
[Lowest]

1-54
 Chapter 1

T-1-32

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Paper Details] (The paper type is [Skew Check Lv.] [Standard]
displayed here.) (*5) [Loose]
[Off]
[VacuumStrngth] [Automatic]*
[Strongest]
[Strong]
[Standard]
[Weak]
[Weakest]
[Width Detection] [Off]
[On]
[NearEnd RollMrgn] [3mm]
[20mm]
[Cut Speed] [Fast]
[Standard]
[Slow]
[Trim Edge First] [Automatic]
[Off]
[On]
[Cutting Mode] [Automatic]
[Eject]
[Manual]
[Bordless Margin] [Automatic]
[Fixed]
[CutDustReduct.] [Off]
[On]
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] [3mm]
[20mm]
[Return Defaults] [No]
[Yes]
[Job Management] [Print Job] [Job List] (Choose a print job) [Delete]
[Preempt Jobs]
[Stored Job] [Mailbox List] (Enter a password if one [Job List] [Print]
has been set.) [Delete]
[Print Job List] [No]
[Yes]
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name]
about the latest three print [User Name]
jobs.)
[Page Count]
[Job Status] [OK]
[CANCELED]
[Print Start Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm]
[Print End Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm]
[Print Time] [xxx sec.]
[Print Size] [xxxxxxxxsq.mm]
[Media Type]
[Interface] [USB]
[Network]
[IEEE1394]
[Ink Consumed] [xx.x ml]
[HDD Information] [HDDSpace]: xx.xGB

1-55
 Chapter 1

T-1-33

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[GL2 Settings] [Color Mode] [Monochrome]
[Color(CAD)1]
[Color(CAD)2]
[Color(CAD)3]
[Color(CAD)4]
[Color(CAD)5]
[Color(CAD)6]
[Print Quality] [Draft]
[Standard]*
[High]
[Print (Economy)] [Off]*
[On]
[Input Resolution] [600dpi]*
[300dpi]
[Paper Source] [Automatic]*
[Roll Paper]
[Cut Sheet]
[Conserve Paper] [Off]*
[On]
[Line Cap] [Software]*
[Rounded]
[Smoothing] [Software]*
[Smooth]
[Line Width] [1dot]
[2dot]
[3dot]
[4dot]*
[5dot]
[6dot]
[7dot]
[ThickenFineLines] [Off]*
[On]
[AdjustFaintLines] [Off]
[On]*
[Auto Rotate] [Off]
[On]*
[Nesting] [Use Nesting] [Off]*
[On]
[Nesting WaitTime] 1-11min.
[Cut Lines] [Off]*
[On]
[On-the-Fly] [Off]*
[On]

1-56
 Chapter 1

T-1-34

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Adjust Printer] [Auto Head Adj.] [Standard Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Advanced Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Auto Print] [Off]
[On]*
[Manual Head Adj](*12) [No]
[Yes]
[Auto Band Adj.] [Standard Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Advanced Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Manual Band Adj] [No]
[Yes]
[Adjust Length](*3) [A:High] [No]
[Yes]
[B:Standard/Draft] [No]
[Yes]
[Head Inc. Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Interface Setup] [EOP Timer] [10 sec.]
[30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[2 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]*
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[TCP/IP] [IP Mode] [Automatic]
[Manual]*
[Protocol](*4) [DHCP] [On]
[Off]*

1-57
 Chapter 1

T-1-35

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Interface Setup] [TCP/IP] [Protocol](*4) [BOOTP] [On]
[Off]*
[RARP] [On]
[Off]*
[IP Setting](*14) [IP Address] 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
[Subnet Mask] 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
[Default G/W] 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
[NetWare] [NetWare] [On]
[Off]*
[Frame Type](*6) [Auto Detect]
[Ethernet 2]
[Ethernet 802.2]*
[Ethernet 802.3]
[Ethernet SNAP]
[Print Service](*6) [BinderyPServer]
[RPrinter]
[NDSPServer]*
[NPrinter]
[AppleTalk] [On]
[Off]*
[Ethernet Driver] [Auto Detect] [On]*
[Off]
[Comm.Mode](*7) [Half Duplex]*
[Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type](*7) [10 Base-T]*
[100 Base-TX]
[Spanning Tree] [Not Use]*
[Use]
[MAC Address] 000085XXXXXX
[Ext.Interface] [No]*
[IEEE1394]
[Init. Settings] [No]*
[Yes]
[Maintenance] [Maint. cart.] [No]
[Yes]

1-58
 Chapter 1

T-1-36

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Maintenance] [Replace P.head] [No]
[Yes]
[Repl. S. Cleaner] [No]
[Yes]
[Move Printer] [Level 1]*
[Level 2]
[Level 3]
[System Setup] [Warning] [Buzzer] [Off]
[On]*
[Detect Mismatch] [Pause]
[Warning]
[None]*
[Keep Media Size] [Off]*
[On]
[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection 1] [ISO A3+]*
[13"x19"(Super B)]
[Sht Selection 2] [ISO B1]*
[28"x40"(ANSI F)]
[Roll Switching] [Size Optimized]*
[No SizeOptimized]
[TrimEdge Reload] [Automatic]
[Off]*
[On]
[Noz. Check Freq.] [Off]
[1 page]
[10 pages]
[Automatic]*
[CarriageScanWdth] [Automatic]*
[Fixed]
[Sleep Timer] [5 min.]*
[10 min.]
[15 min.]
[20 min.]
[30 min.]
[40 min.]
[50 min.]
[60 min.]
[240 min.]

1-59
 Chapter 1

T-1-37

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[System Setup] [Length Unit] [meter]*
[feet/inch]
[Time Zone] [0: London (GMT)]
[+1: Paris, Rome]
[+2: Athens, Cairo]
[+3: Moscow]
[+4: Eerevan, Baku]
[+5: Islamabad]
[+6: Dacca]
[+7: Bangkok]
[+8: Hong Kong]
[+9: Tokyo, Seoul]
[+10: Canberra]
[+11: NewCaledonia]
[+12: Wellington]
[-12: Eniwetok]
[-11: Midway is.]
[-10: Hawaii (AHST)]
[-9: Alaska (AKST)]
[-8: Oregon (PST)]
[-7: Arizona (MST)]
[-6: Texas (CST)]
[-5: NewYork (EST)]
[-4: Santiago]
[-3: Buenos Aires]
[-2: ]
[-1: Cape Verde]
[Date Format] [yyyy/mm/dd]*
[dd/mm/yyyy]
[mm/dd/yyyy]
[Date & Time] [Date] [yyyy/mm/dd](*8)
[Time] [hh:mm]

1-60
 Chapter 1

T-1-38

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[System Setup] [Language] [Japanese]*
[English]
[Francais]
[Italiano]
[Deutsch]
[Espanol]
[Pyccknn]
[Chinese]
[Korea]
[Contrast Adj.] -4 to 4
[Reset PaprSetngs] [No]
[Yes]
[Erase HDD Data] [High Speed] [No]
[Yes]
[Secure High Spd.] [No]
[Yes]
[Secure] [No]
[Yes]
[Output Method] [Print]*
[Print(auto delete)]
[Save in mail box]
[Save beforePrint] [Off]*
[On]
[Save in Comm.Box] [Off]
[On]*
[Test Print] [Status Print] [No]
[Yes]
[Media Details] [No]
[Yes]
[Print Job Log] [No]
[Yes]
[Menu Map] [No]
[Yes]
[Nozzle Check] [No]
[Yes]
[Information] [System Info]
[Error Log] 1.xxxxxxxx-xxxx
2.xxxxxxxx-xxxx

*1: Displayed if a roll is loaded.

*2: Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
*3: Displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.
*4: Only these menus are displayed during printing.
*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Media Guide. The media type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well
as on the Control Panel is updated when you install Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using Media
Configuration Tool.
*6: Available only if Auto Detect is Off.
*7: Available only if NetWare is On.
*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*12: Displayed if paper is loaded in the tray.
*14: This menu is only displayed during printing.
*16: Not displayed if a roll or a sheet has been fed.

1-61
 Chapter 1

3. Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
T-1-39

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Menu Durng Prtng] [Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]
[Head Cleaning B]
[Fine Band Adj.] -5 to 5
[Information] [System Info]
[Error Log] 1.xxxxxxxx-xxxx
2.xxxxxxxx-xxxx

1-62
 Chapter 1

4. Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.
T-1-40

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Paper Cut] Displayed if a roll is loaded.
Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. The paper will be fed, if necessary, so that the
sheet is at least 10 cm (39.4 in.)long after the cut. The paper will not be cut if there is not enough
paper left to feed the paper this much.
[Rep. Ink Tank] When replacing the Ink Tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Head Cleaning] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head
Cleaning A.
[Media Menu] Specify the type and size of paper.
[Paper Details] Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and borderless printing
options.
[Job Management] Manage print jobs on the printer's hard disk.
[GL2 Settings] Make settings for making prints using GL2.
[Adjust Printer] Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern.
[Interface Setup] Configure the EOP timer and network settings.
[Maintenance] Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to move the printer.
[System Setup] Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display language.
[Test Print] Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.
Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details.
Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and size, amount
of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is general, not specific in nature.)
Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.
Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
[Information] Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs.

[Media Menu]
T-1-41

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Cut Sheet Type] Choose the type of sheets.
[Roll Media Type] Choose the type of roll.
[Roll Length Set] Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed in meters
or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit.

[Chk Remain.Roll] Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can
be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. ChooseOff if you prefer not to print the
barcode.

1-63
 Chapter 1

[Paper Details]
T-1-42

Setting Item Description, Instructions

(The paper type is displayed [Roll DryingTime] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
here.) [Scan Wait Time] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in
consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a
wait time.
[Feed Priority] Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select Automatic. Choose Print Length if you
prefer to feed the paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing Print Length may result
in slight banding in the direction of Carriage scanning.
[Adjust Length] Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length.
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper.
Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the discrepancy that you measured (as
a percentage).
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by setting the adjustment value toward
+. For paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by setting the adjustment value
toward -.
[Head Height] Adjust the Printhead height.
[Skew Check Lv.] If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper that has an irregular width,
choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection.
However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling
may occur.
[VacuumStrngth] Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.
[Width Detection] Make this setting when the print size is different from the media size, for example, when you
want to make a print within a frame.
When you select [Off], the paper width is not detected.
[NearEnd RollMrgn] Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality
at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 5mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.
[Cut Speed] Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive
from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.
[Trim Edge First] If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
[Cutting Mode] Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed cutter.
Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after printing. If you choose Manual, the
paper will not be cut after printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.
Choose Eject if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing, as when
waiting for ink to dry.
[Bordless Margin] Adjust the margin during borderless printing.
Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the paper width and configure the
margin settings for borderless printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is
selected, choose Fixed. In this case, the paper width is not detected automatically, and the
document is printed without borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.
[CutDustReduct.] Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting film and similar media by
printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after
cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if
you use adhesive paper.
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading
edge.
Note that if you choose 5mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge.
[Return Defaults] Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default values.

1-64
 Chapter 1

[Job Management]
T-1-43

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Print Job] [Job List] (Choose a print [Delete] Delete the current job or queued jobs.
job) [Preempt Jobs] Print the job first after the current print job is
finished printing.
[Stored Job] [Mailbox List] (Enter a password [Job List]-[Print] Prints a saved job.
if one has been [Job List]-[Delete] Deletes a saved job.
set.)
[Job List]-[Print] Prints a list of saved jobs.
[Job Log] (Choose from [Document Name] Displays the name of the document in the most
information about recently printed job.
the latest three [User Name] Displays the name of the user who has transmitted
print jobs.) the job.
[Page Count] Displays the number of sheets of the job.
[Job Status] Displays the result of processing of the job.
[Print Start Time] Displays the time at which the job started printing.
[Print End Time] Displays the time at which the job finished
printing.
[Print Time] Displays the time spent printing the job.
[Print Size] Displays the size of the paper used for printing the
job.
[Media Type] Displays the type of the paper used for printing the
job.
[Interface] Displays the interface of the job.
[Ink Consumed] Displays the amount of ink consumed for printing
the job.
[HDD [HDDSpace] Displays the size of free hard disk space on the
Information] printer.

1-65
 Chapter 1

[GL2 Settings]
T-1-44

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Color Mode] [Monochrome] Print by the monochrome.
[Color(CAD)1] Print by the standard color.
[Color(CAD)2] Print by the bright color.
[Color(CAD)3] Print by the color emulated the Canon BJ-W3000/W3050.
[Color(CAD)4] Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 500/800.
[Color(CAD)5] Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 1000.
[Color(CAD)6] Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 4000/4050.
[Print Quality] Select the print quality.
[Print (Economy)] Prints with a lower grade of print than normal, but with less ink consumption. Select [ON] to
economize on inks.
[Input Resolution] Choose the printer input resolution from between [600dpi] and [300dpi].
[Paper Source] Select how to feed paper for printing on the HP-GL/2.
[Conserve Paper] Prints by economizing on paper.
[Line Cap] Choose the shape of the end of a line from between [Software] and [Rounded].
[Smoothing] Choose whether to draw an arc with a smooth curve or with a polygon.
[Line Width] Select the width of each line to print for data that does not have a line width specified. The line
width is expressed in increments of 300 dpi.
[ThickenFineLines] Select [On] to print thin lines clearly.
[AdjustFaintLines] If thin lines print in a tint of color varied from other patterns, selecting [Off] may provide the
print result as intended, though the thin lines may print, interrupted, depending on the color.
[Auto Rotate] If a document has its long side shorter than the roll width, the page rotates by 90 degrees
automatically to economize on paper. If a document contains horizontally long data such that
it has its long side longer than the roll width and its short side shorter than the roll width, the
page rotates 90 degrees to print within the boundaries of the paper.
HP RTL cannot rotate.
[Nesting] [Use Nesting] Select [On] to print pages when they are tiled fully to the roll width, instead of printing them
one by one.
[Nesting WaitTime] Set the time to elapse before printing.
[Cut Lines] Select [On] to print perforated lines between pages.
[On-the-Fly] In printing data consisting solely of HP RTL, if the data is slow to print, select [On] to expedite
the time at which the data starts printing. Verify the print result to make sure that images are
not chipped in this case.

1-66
 Chapter 1

[Adjust Printer]
T-1-45

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Auto Head Adj.] [Standard Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of
Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction.
[Advanced Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of
Printhead alignment relative to the nozzle and printing direction.
[Auto Print] Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the Advanced Adj. operations after you
replace the Printhead.
[Manual Head Ad] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing
direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.
[Auto Band Adj.] [Standard Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic
adjustment of the feed amount.
[Advanced Adj.] Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon paper, or paper for purposes
other than checking output.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic
adjustment of the feed amount. Note that this function takes more time and requires more ink
than Standard Adj.

[Manual Head Adj] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing
direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.
[Adjust Length] [A:High] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after
[B:Standard/Draft] which you can enter the amount of adjustment.

[Head Inc. Adj.] Select [Yes] to print an adjustment pattern for adjusting the inclination of the printhead.

1-67
 Chapter 1

[Interface Setup]
T-1-46

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[EOP Timer] Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that
cannot be received by the printer.
[TCP/IP] [TCP/IP] Specify the TCP/IP protocol settings. To apply your changes,
choose Register Setting.
[IP Mode] Choose whether the printer IP address is configured
automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.
[Protocol] [DHCP] Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address
[BOOTP] automatically.

[RARP]
[IP Setting] [IP Address] Specify the printer network information when using a static IP
[Subnet Mask] address.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the
[Default G/W] network subnet mask and default gateway.
[NetWare] [NetWare] Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes, choose
Register Setting.
[Frame Type] Specify the frame type to use.
[Print Service] Choose the print service.
[AppleTalk] Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To apply your
changes, choose Register Setting.
[Ethernet Driver] [Auto Detect] Specify the communication method. To apply your changes,
choose Register Setting.
Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN
communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings values of
Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.
[Comm.Mode] Choose the LAN communication method.
[Ethernet Type] Choose the LAN transfer rate.
[Spanning Tree] Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the
LAN.
[MAC Address] Displays the MAC address.
[Ext.Interface] When installing the expansion interface board, choose whether
the expansion interface board is used.
[Init. Settings] A confirmation message is displayed if you press the button.
Choose [OK] to restore the network settings to the default values.

[Maintenance]
T-1-47

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Maint. cart.] When exchanging the maintenance cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the
screen.
[Replace P.head] Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is
low.
When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

[Repl. S. Cleaner] When replacing the Shaft Cleaner, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Move Printer] When transferring the printer to another location, choose the level of transfer and follow the
instructions on the screen.

1-68
 Chapter 1

[System Setup]
T-1-48

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Warning] [Buzzer] Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.
[Detect Mismatch] Choose Warning for notification (display of a warning message) during printing if the paper
type specified in the printer menu does not match the paper type in the printer driver. Choose
None to continue print without notification. Choose Pause to have printing paused under these
circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing by pressing the Online button.
[Keep Media Size] Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing instead of other settings. The
margin setting of the printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver
if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the margin from being printed.
Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the margin setting of the printer
driver is smaller than that of the printer driver, text or images will not be cut off. However, this
requires longer paper because the actual margin will be equal to the margin setting of the printer
driver plus the margin setting of the printer menu.
[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection 1] Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO A3+] or [13"x19"(Super B)], when the detected size
of the cut sheet is between these sizes.
[Sht Selection 2] Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO B1] or [28"x40"(ANSI F)], when the detected size
of the cut sheet is between these sizes.
[Roll Switching] [Size Optimized] Choose the paper size that can minimize margin of the paper.
[No SizeOptimized] Print from paper loaded on the platen.
[TrimEdge Reload] Select whether cut the leading edge of the paper when the paper at the standby position has
loaded. Cut it when the roller trace at the standby position attract attention. Choose On to cut it
everytime when the paper at the standby position has loaded. Choose Automatic to cut it when
the paper at the standby position during two days or more has loaded.
[Noz. Check Freq.] Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging. Choose 1 page to check once per
printed page. Choose 10 pages to check once per ten printed pages. Choose Automatic to have
the printer automatically adjust the timing for checks based on the frequency of nozzle use.
[CarriageScanWdth] Set the scan width of the carriage for printing. Select [Automatic] to move the carriage to meet
the width of the loaded paper. Selecting [Fixed] will reduce stains on the back of the paper but
at the cost of a somewhat longer print time.
[Sleep Timer] Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.
[Length Unit] Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed. You can switch the unit
displayed for Roll Length Set and the remaining paper amount displayed in the submenu.
[Time Zone] Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the
difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
[Date Format] Specify the date format.
[Date & Time] [Date] Set the current date.
[Time] Set the current time.
[Language] Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
[Contrast Adj.] Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
[Reset PaprSetngs] Restores settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the factory default
values.
[Erase HDD Data] [High Speed] Delete the file management information of the saved data in the HDD.
[Secure High Spd.] Overwrite the random data in the whole of the hard disk drive.
[Secure] Overwrite 00 and FF and random data in the whole of the hard disk drive once at a time.
Execute the verify check whether the data has written correctly to the hard disk drive.
[Output Method] [Print] Choose how to print.
[Print(auto delete)] Select [Print] to perform normal printing. Select [Print (Auto delete)], print data and remove it
[Save in mail box] from the hard disk. Select [Save in mail box] to only save data to the box, without printing it.

[Save beforePrint] Select [On] to start printing data when its save is complete.
[Save in Comm.Box] Select [Off] to print data without saving it to the common box.

1-69
 Chapter 1

[Information]
T-1-49

Setting Item Description, Instructions

[System Info] [Version] [Firmware] Displays the version of the printer and firmware.
[Boot] Displays the version of the boot ROM.
[MIT] Displays the version of the MIT database format.
[s/n] Displays the printer's serial number.
[MAC] Displays the MAC address of the printer.
[IP] Displays the printer IP address.
[Error Log] [########-####] Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).

1-70
 Chapter 1

1.6.4 Basket Unit

0017-9389

iPF810

The Basket Unit(output stacker) can be installed at four positions, as shown.

[4]

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-1-29

[4]

[2]
[1]

[3]

F-1-30
[1] When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, set it to this position.
[2] When the Output Stacker is not used, set it to this position.
[3] When printing on large and stiff sheets, or when the Media Take-up Unit is used, or when the Output Stacker is stored for long periods, lower it to this position
for storage.
When using the Output Stacker again after storage, reattach the Basket Rod on the front of the Output Stacker to the tips of the left and right Basket Rods and pull
the side rods out completely.
[4] When printing banners or when printing on delicate paper, set it to this position.

- When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position [1]. If you do not, printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker,
and the printed surface may become soiled.
- The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.
- Before using the Output Stacker, remove the Rewind Spool. If you do not, it may prevent printed documents from being held correctly, and it they may be
scratched.

a. Using the Output Stacker in the position for ejection in the front of the printer
You can also set the Output Stacker to the following position when printing banners or when printing on delicate paper.

MEMO:
- Always choose [Cutting Mode] > [Eject] in the main menu when the Output Stacker is in the position for ejection in the front of the printer. If you choose [Auto-
matic], printed documents may be damaged.
- During ejection in the front of the printer, be especially careful when using delicate paper or paper that curls easily.
- With some types of paper, the leading edge may curl or bend during ejection. In this case, straighten out the paper. Printed documents may be damaged if the paper
is curled or bent.
- Some types of paper may get caught between the Ejection Guide and Output Stacker during ejection. In this case, free the paper from where it is caught. Printed
documents may be damaged if the paper gets caught.

1-71
 Chapter 1

1) Lift the Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front, and push it all the way back.

F-1-31
2) Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Rods, and remove the back Basket Rod and the black cord from the Rod Holder.

F-1-32

1-72
 Chapter 1

3) Store the left and right Basket Rods. Next, remove the Rod Holder Adapter, leaving the Rod Holder attached, and put it in front of the printer.

F-1-33
4) Pull out the Basket Hooks from the left and right side of the Ejection Guide.

F-1-34
5) Attach the Basket Rod to the Basket Hooks so that the white tag of the Basket Cloth is on the left side.

F-1-35

1-73
 Chapter 1

6) Form the Basket Cloth into a sloping shape to make it taut, and attach the middle Basket Rod to the Rod Holder.

F-1-36

b. Stowing the Output Stacker

Stow the Output Stacker if you will use the Media Take-up Unit or if you will not use the Output Stacker for an extended period.

1) Lift the front Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front, and push it all the way back.

F-1-37

1-74
 Chapter 1

2) Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Rods. Roll up the Basket Cloth and put it at the back of the Bottom Stand Stay.

F-1-38

F-1-39

Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor.

F-1-40

1-75
 Chapter 1

3) Push in the left and right Basket Rods toward the back all the way, until they stop.

F-1-41

1-76
 Chapter 1

1.7 Safety and Precautions

1.7.1 Safety Precautions

1.7.1.1 Moving Parts

0020-5470

iPF810 / iPF820

Be careful not to get your hair, clothes, or accessories caught in the moving parts of the printer.
These include the carriage unit activated by the carriage motor, carriage belt, ink tube and flexible cable; feed motor-driven feed roller and pinch roller; and purge
motor-driven purge unit.
To prevent accidents, the upper cover of the printer is locked during printing so that itdoes not open. If the upper cover is opened in the online/offline mode, the
carriage motor, feed motor, and other driving power supplies are turned off.

[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

[8] [7] [6]

[14]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12] [13]
F-1-42
T-1-50

[1] Carriage belt [8] Feed assembly

[2] Pinch roller [9] Feed motor
[3] Carriage [10] Roll media pick-up drive unit
[4] Ink tube unit [11] Lower roll media pick-up drive unit(iPF820)
[5] Feed roller [12] Cutter unit
[6] Pinch roller pressure drive unit [13] Purge unit
[7] Carriage motor [14] Lift drive unit

1-77
 Chapter 1

1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink

0020-5471

iPF810 / iPF820

1. Ink passages
Be careful not to touch the ink passages of the printer or to allow ink to stain the workbench, hands, clothes or the printer under repair.
The ink flows through the ink tank unit, carriage unit, purge unit, maintenance jet tray, borderless print ink groove, maintenance cartridge and the ink tubes that
relay ink to each unit.

[5] [4]

[6] [3]
[9] [8] [7]

[2]

[1]

F-1-43
T-1-51

[1] Maintenance cartridge [6] Carriage

[2] Purge unit [7] Borderless printing ink groove
[3] Ink tank unit [8] Platen maintenance jet groove
[4] Head management sensor ink tray [9] BP maintenance jet tray
[5] HP maintenance jet tray

Although the ink is not harmful to the human body, it contains organic solvents.
Avoid getting the ink in your mouth or eyes.
Flush well with water and see a doctor if contact occurs.
In case of accidental ingestion of a large quantity, call a doctor immediately.

Since this ink contains pigment, stains will not come out of clothing.

1-78
 Chapter 1

2. Ink mist
Since the printhead prints by squirting ink onto the media, a minute amount of ink mist is generated in the printing unit during printing. The ink mist is collected in
the printer by the airflow. However, uncollected ink mist may stain the platen unit, carriage unit, main rail unit, external unit, or purge unit.
These stains may soil the print media or hands and clothes when servicing the printer, wipe them off carefully with a soft, well-wrung damp cloth.

[2]

[3] [1]

F-1-44
T-1-52

[1] Purge unit [3] Platen unit/Carriage unit/Main rail unit

[2] Upper cover

1-79
 Chapter 1

1.7.1.3 Electric Parts

0020-5474

iPF810 / iPF820

The electrical unit of the printer is activated when connected to the AC power supply.
At the rear of the printer are the main controller, power supply, interface connector, and optional media take-up unit connector. The head relay PCB and carriage
relay PCB are incorporated in the carriage unit, and the operation panel is located on the upper right cover.
When servicing the printer with the cover removed, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting contacts.

[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[5]

Online Data Information Power

Message

Cleaning
(3sec.)
Stop
Menu Load/Eject (1sec.)

[13]
[6]

[12]
[7]
[9] [8]
[10]

[11]
F-1-45
T-1-53

[1] Operation panel [8] Power supply PCB

[2] Carriage relay PCB [9] Main controller PCB
[3] Head relay PCB [10] Ethernet connector
[4] AC inlet [11] USB port
[5] Lower roll unit connector(iPF820) [12] Media take-up relay PCB(iPF810)
[6] Lower roll unit relay PCB(iPF820) [13] Media take-up unit connector(iPF810)
[7] lower roll unit PCB(iPF820)

1-80
 Chapter 1

1.7.2 Other Precautions

1.7.2.1 Printhead
0020-1924

iPF810 / iPF820

1. How to Handle the Printhead

Do not open the printhead package until you are ready to install the head.
When installing the printhead in the printer, hold the knob[1] and then remove the protective cap 1[2] and protective cap 2[3] in that order.
Do not reattach the protective cap 2[3] to the printhead because the cap may damage the nozzles[4].
To prevent the nozzles from getting clogged with foreign matter or dried ink, install the printhead immediately after you remove the protective caps.
Also make sure to press down the locking lever of the printhead until you feel a click.
In addition, to prevent clogging of the nozzles with foreign matter and improper supply of ink, never touch the nozzles[4] or ink port[6], or wipe it with tissue paper
or anything else.
Do not touch Electriacl contact[5].
Also, never attempt to disassemble/reassemble the printhead or wash it with water.

MEMO:
If the nozzles are clogged or an ink suction problem occurs, white lines can appear on the printout a constant frequency or color dulling can occur. If this problem
is not resolved by cleaning operations, replace the printhead with a new one.

[1]

[4]

[2]

[6]

[3]

[5]

F-1-46
T-1-54

[1] knob [4] nozzles

[2] protective cap 1 [5] Electrical contact
[3] protective cap 2 [6] ink port

2. Capping
The printer will perform the capping operation when printing has ended or during standby due to an error, in order to protect the printhead and avoid ink leakage.
If the power cord is accidentally unplugged, turn off the Power button, reconnect the power cord, and then turn on the Power button. Confirm that the printer starts
up properly and enters to the "Online" or "Offline" status, and then power off the printer using the Power button.

Improper "capping operation" may cause clogged nozzles due to dried ink or ink leakage from the printhead.

3. When the printer is not used for a long time

Keep the printhead installed in the printer even when it is not used for an extended period of time.

If the printhead is left uninstalled, a printing failure may arise from closed nozzles due to depositing of foreign matter or dried ink when it is reinstalled.
Even if the head remains installed, the nozzle may dry out and cause a printing failure if the ink is drained for transport.

4. Conductivity of Ink
The ink used in this printer is electrically conductive. If ink leaks to into the mechanical unit, wipe clean with a soft, well-wrung damp cloth. If ink leaks onto
electrical units, wipe them completely using tissue paper. If you cannot remove ink completely, replace the electrical units with new ones.

1-81
 Chapter 1

If electrical units are powered with ink leaked onto them, the units may damage.
Never connect the power cord when ink has leaded onto the electrical units.

1.7.2.2 Ink Tank

0012-6292

iPF810 / iPF820

1. Unpacking the Ink Tank

Do not unpack the ink tank until you are ready to install it.
When installing the ink tank, be sure to shake it slowly 7 to 8 times before unpacking it. Otherwise, the ink ingredients may precipitate and degrade the print quality.
To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink port, installed the unpacked ink tank in the printer immediately.

2. Handling the Ink Tank

To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink flow path and causing ink suction and printing problems, never touch the ink port and contacts of the ink tank.
When you press down the ink tank cover, the needle enters the ink port, allowing ink to flow between the printer and ink tank.
Do not raise or lower the ink tank cover except when replacing the ink tank.

F-1-47

1-82
 Chapter 1

1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer

0020-5475

iPF810 / iPF820

1. Precautions against Static Electricity

Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices or change their
electrical characteristics.
In particular, never touch the printhead contacts[1].

[1]

F-1-48
2. Fixing the Carriage
After completion of printing, the carriage is mechanically locked by the lock arm in the purge unit at the same moment the printhead is capped.
Before transporting the printer, secure the carriage at its home position using belt stoppers[1] so that the carriage does not become separated from the lock arm and
damage or ink does not leak.

[1]

F-1-49

1-83
 Chapter 1

3. Contact of Linear Scale/Carriage Shaft

Please do not touch a linear scale and the carriage shaft when the inside of the top cover is opened, and execute maintenance.
When touching a linear scale and the carriage shaft, it might cause defective movement of the carriage and a defective print.

[1]

[2]

F-1-50
[1] Linear Scale
[2] Carriage Shaft

4. Replacing the maintenance cartridge

When the maintenance cartridge detects that tank is full, the "Repl. Maint. C" error appears. In this case the maintenance cartridge must be replaced.
The printer will not operate until the error is cancelled.
Be careful that the waste ink does not splash when you remove the used maintenance cartridge from the printer.

MEMO:
This printer has an EEPROM in the maintenance cartridge and the maintenance cartridge status is controlled by the main controller PCB which reads and writes
the content of that EEPROM. Therefore, initializing the counter information will not be needed when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.

5. Refilling the ink

After removing the ink in the printer according to the automatic or manual ink draining procedure to disassemble, reassemble, or transport/ship the printer, refill
the ink as soon as possible upon completion of those tasks.
If the ink remaining in the printer after the removal has dried up, the ink deposits on the surfaces of the components may cause damage or abnormal operation.

1-84
 Chapter 1

1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer

1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer

0013-5942

iPF810 / iPF820

This printer counts the print length, number of ink tank replacements, carriage driving time, number of cleaning operations, number of cutter operations, and so on
and stores them in the main controller's EEPROM as a COUNTER in Service mode.
COUNTER provides important information about the printer usage status.
You can check this information by printing it in the service mode or displaying it on the display.

Following the precautions below when servicing the printer.

(1) Repairing/replacing the PCB

When replacing the main controller, follow the specified replacement procedure.
For the main controller replacement procedure, see "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Boards".

(2) After replacing the carriage unit

The information about the carriage driving time arises in the carriage unit. After replacing the carriage unit, select INITIALIZE > CARRIAGE in the service mode
to initialize the information about the carriage driving time.
(3) After replacing the purge unit
The information about the number of cleanings arises in the purge unit. After replacing the purge unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [PURGE] in the service mode to
initialize (clear) the information about the number of cleanings.

(4) On replacement of supplies

After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.
For the consumable parts, see "Maintenance" > "Consumable Parts".

You cannot check the counter information once it is initialized (cleared). Be careful not to initialize the counter information before checking it.
You cannot modify the counter information from the operation panel.

1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version

0013-5945

iPF810 / iPF820
Firmware has been downloaded to the main controller.
When you have replaced the main controller, check that the firmware is the latest version. If not, update it to the latest version.

Reference:
For how to up update the main controller, refer to "TROUBLESHOOTING" > "Update".

1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity

0013-5947

iPF810 / iPF820
Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices.
To prevent this, discharge any static buildup by touching a grounded metal fitting before you start disassembling the printer.

1.7.3.4 Self-diagnostic Feature

0013-5950

iPF810 / iPF820

The printer has a self-diagnostic feature to analyze hardware problems.

The self-diagnosis result is shown on the display and indicated by lamps.
For detailed information, see "Error Codes".

1.7.3.5 Disposing of the Lithium Battery

0013-5952

iPF810 / iPF820

The main controller PCB of this printer is equipped with a lithium battery to back up various data.

Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

"For CA, USA Only

Included battery contains Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail."

1-85
 Chapter 1

1-86
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
 Contents

Contents

2.1 Basic Operation Outline.................................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Printer Diagram............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Printer Diagram............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3 Print Signal Sequence .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.4 Print Driving ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2 Firmware ........................................................................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off ................................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.3 Print Control................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function........................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.5 Head Management ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control................................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.2.7 Pause between Pages.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.2.8 White Raster Skip ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.9 Sleep Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-15
2.2.10 Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.3 Printer Mechanical System ..........................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.3.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.2 Ink Passage................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-18
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage.......................................................................................................................................................................2-18
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................2-19
2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................2-19
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................2-21
2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit....................................................................................................................................................................2-21
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................2-22
2.3.2.4 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-24
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead............................................................................................................................................................................2-24
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit .........................................................................................................................................................................2-27
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-29
2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge ..........................................................................................................................................................................2-29
2.3.2.7 Air Flow ........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-30
2.3.2.7.1 Air flow .................................................................................................................................................................................................2-30
2.3.3 Paper Path .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.3.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path.........................................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.3.3.2 Paper Path......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-32
2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Pick-up/Feed Unit .............................................................................................................................................................2-32
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-35
2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit.........................................................................................................................................................................2-35
2.4 Printer Electrical System..............................................................................................................................................2-36
2.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-36
2.4.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-36
2.4.1.2 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-38
2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components.................................................................................................................................................................2-40
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components ...................................................................................................................................................................2-42
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components ........................................................................................................................................................................2-42
 Contents

2.4.5 Motor Driver .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-44

2.4.5.1 Media take-up PCB components .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-44
2.4.5.2 Lower roll unit PCB components ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-44
2.4.6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB............................................................................................................................................ 2-44
2.4.6.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components............................................................................................................................................. 2-44
2.4.7 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.4.7.1 Power supply block diagram......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-45
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................................... 2-46
2.5.1 Sensors for covers ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-46
2.5.2 Ink passage system..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.5.3 Carriage system.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.5.4 Paper path system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-51
2.5.5 Media take-up Unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-53
2.5.6 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-53
 Chapter 2

2.1 Basic Operation Outline

2.1.1 Printer Diagram

0020-5476

iPF810

A printer diagram is shown below.

Main controller PCB Operation panel PCB

IC601-IC604
SO-DIMM
SDRAM Maintenance cartridge
relay PCB

IC802 IC701/IC703
CN201 J1801 EEPROM FLASH ROM Maintenance cartridge
Power supply PCB
ROM PCB

Ink tank
IC803 IC1
RTC ASIC
Ink tank
ROM PCB
BAT 801
Lithium battery
J1201/ Ink detection sensor
J1202 IC1201
HDD HDD Controller
Linear encoder USB Sensors
sensor IEEE1394
Media take-up on/off sensor
LAN Network BOARD Media take-up paper
J205 detection sensor

J104
Motor
J2601
Head IC201
J101/J102/ J101/J201/ Media take-up motor
J2403
J103 J202 IC2/
IC J3201 J102/
4101 J103 J102
ASIC
Multi J501
J3003 J102 IC104
sensor J102/J203/ J3401/J3601/
J3602 Motor
J204 J101 J101 driver
Head reley PCB
Media take-up
Media take-up
Printhead fixer J206 PCB
relay PCB
lever sensor J2402/J2403/
Carriage relay PCB J4001
Fans
J2401/J2403/J2501/J2702/
J3002/J3151/J3152/J3801/ Platen suction fan
J3901/J4001/J4002
Sensors/Switches MIst fan
BP maintenance jet suction fan
Carriage HP sensor IC2700/IC4502 J2702/J3901/
J4001
Solenoids/Clutches
Pump encoder sensor Driver
Pump cam sensor Upper cover lock solenoid(L)/(R)
Media sensor Flapper solenoid
Head management sensor Roll media rewinding clutch
Feed roller encoder sensor Roll media pick-up cam clutch
Feed roller HP sensor Roll media pick-up roller clutch
Valve open/closed detection sensor Roll media pick-up pressure clutch
Agitation cam sensor Pinch roller pressure clutch
Temperature/humidity detection sensor
J2401/J2501/
Lift cam sensor IC2700/IC2802/
J2801/J3150/
HP maintenance jet pump encoder sensor IC2900/IC2902/
J3901/J4001/
Cutter HP sensor IC3100/IC4501/
J4002/J4003
Motors
Cutter left position sensor IC4601/IC4602
Roll media detection sensor Motor driver Carriage motor
Roll media pick-up cam sensor Feed motor
Poll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor Lift motor
Roll media width detection sensor Purge motor
Pinch roller release detection sensor Valve motor
Pinch roller pressure detection sensor Cutter motor
Upper cover lock switch(L)/(R) Roll media pick-up motor
Pinch roller pressure release switch Pinch roller pressure motor
Ink tank cover switch HP maintenance jet pump motor

F-2-1

2-1
 Chapter 2

2.1.2 Printer Diagram

0020-5477

iPF820

A printer diagram is shown below.

Operation panel PCB

Maintenance cartridge
Main controller PCB relay PCB

IC601-IC604
SO-DIMM Maintenance cartridge
SDRAM
ROM PCB
Ink tank
IC802 IC701/IC703
CN201 J1801 EEPROM FLASH ROM
Power supply PCB Ink tank ROM PCB

Ink detection sensor

IC803 IC1 Sensors/Switches

RTC ASIC Lower roll media detection sensor
Lower roll media pick-up cam sensor
Lower roll media pick-up roller
BAT 801
paper detection sensor
Lithium battery
J1201/
Lower roll media width detection
J1202 sensor
IC1201
HDD Lower roll unit detection switch (L)/(R)
HDD Controller
Linear encoder USB Motor
sensor IEEE1394 Lower roll media pick-up
motor J2
LAN Network BOARD
J3/J6 IC2
J205
Motor driver
J104 J1
IC1 Driver
J2601
IC201 Lower roll unit PCB
Head J101/J102/ J101/J201/ J2403
J103 J202 IC2/
J3/J4/J5
IC J3201
4101 Solenoids/Clutches
ASIC Lower flapper solenoid
Multi J501
Lower roll media rewinding
sensor J102/J203/ J3401/J3601/ J4101 J2
J204 J3602 clutch
J1 Lower roll media pick-up
Head reley PCB cam clutch
Lower roll unit Lower roll media pick-up
Printhead fixer J206 relay PCB roller clutch
lever sensor Lower roll media pick-up
Carriage relay PCB J2402/J2403/ pressure clutch
J4001
J2401/J2403/J2501/J2702/ Fans
J3002/J3151/J3152/J3801/
J3901/J4001/J4002 Platen suction fan
Sensors/Switches MIst fan
BP maintenance jet suction fan
Carriage HP sensor
Pump encoder sensor IC2700/IC4502 J2702/J3901/ Solenoids/Clutches
Pump cam sensor Driver J4001
Media sensor Upper cover lock solenoid(L)/(R)
Head management sensor Flapper solenoid
Feed roller encoder sensor Roll media rewinding clutch
Feed roller HP sensor Roll media pick-up cam clutch
Valve open/closed detection sensor Roll media pick-up roller clutch
Agitation cam sensor Roll media pick-up pressure clutch
Temperature/humidity detection sensor Pinch roller pressure clutch
Lift cam sensor IC2700/IC2802/
HP maintenance jet pump encoder sensor IC2900/IC2902/ J2401/J2501/
IC3100/IC4501/ J2801/J3150/
Cutter HP sensor Motors
IC4601/IC4602 J3901/J4001/
Cutter left position sensor J4002/J4003
Roll media detection sensor Motor driver
Carriage motor
Roll media pick-up cam sensor Feed motor
Poll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor Lift motor
Roll media width detection sensor Purge motor
Pinch roller release detection sensor Valve motor
Pinch roller pressure detection sensor Cutter motor
Upper cover lock switch(L)/(R) Roll media pick-up motor
Pinch roller pressure release switch Pinch roller pressure motor
Ink tank cover switch HP maintenance jet pump motor
F-2-2

2-2
 Chapter 2

2.1.3 Print Signal Sequence

0017-4696

iPF810 / iPF820

The signal sequence from when the printer receives the print signals until printing starts is shown in Figure.

: Image data
Host computer : Mask pattern data
: Heat pulse
Printer driver : Command data
: PCI bus
a a
: Data bus
: Universal sirial bus

Interface unit
Expansion USB LAN

b b
b
i
ASIC (IC1/L-COA)
EEPROM
Image processing Printhead
c g
DDR-SDRAM unit EEPROM
d
SDR-SDRAM
f Carriage PCB
e
FLASH ROM f Latch IC

e,h

e
i e

Ink tank
h
EEPROM
ASIC (IC2)

i
Operation panel

i
Sensor and drive unit

Main controller

F-2-3
a) The printer driver on the host computer transmits print data, including command data, to the printer after compressing the image data, without resolution, color
and 12-color binarization conversion.
To achieve high-quality image output, the image processing table data used for image data color conversion and binarization conversion are generated as command
data to meet the Media Type and other specifications of the printer driver.
b) This printer receives print data from the individual interfaces on the main controller, transmitting the received print data to ASIC (IC1).
c) The main controller decompresses the print data transmitted to the ASIC and gets it through resolution, color and 5-color binarization conversion while loading
the data into DDR-SDRAM from time to time.
It also converts the print data to 5-color binary equivalents of image and command data.
d) The ASIC (IC1) generates image data synthesized with mask data within the ASIC in sync with the discharge time while loading the data into DDR-SDRAM
from time to time.
e) The ASIC (IC2) collects printhead information from EEPROM mounted on the printheads and the printer temperature from the latch IC on the carriage board
and transmit them to the ASIC (IC1).
The ASIC (IC1) also receives mask pattern data from the firmware installed in flash ROM.
f) The ASIC (IC1) converts the image data synthesized with the mask pattern to data associated with the printhead information and the printer temperature, trans-
mitting the data to the printheads as a print signal. It transmits heat pulses to the printheads at the same time to optimize head driving.
g) The printheads convert the received print signal from a serial signal to a parallel signal for each row of nozzles and ANDs it with the heat pulses for perform
printing.
h) The ASIC (IC1) controls the general aspects of image processing and print drive control by detecting the status of the individual printer components with refer-
ence to the adjustment values stored in EEPROM. SDR-SDRAM is used as work memory.
i) The ASIC (IC2) controls the general aspects of drive control by controlling button actuations and message displays on the basis of the firmware installed in flash
ROM.

2-3
 Chapter 2

2.1.4 Print Driving

0013-5398

iPF810 / iPF820

Print and control signals are transferred via the carriage relay PCB and head relay PCB to the printheads to discharge inks from the nozzle assembly at printing.
Each printhead has 12 trains of nozzles arranged in a zigzag pattern.
This printer uses one printhead.
(In installed state, from left to right, C, M, Y, MBK, MBK, BK)
Print signals directed at each nozzle train are even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV) and odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD). These are
transferred in timing with a data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
The Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) drive control signal enables inks to be discharged from the nozzles.

1. Pint drive control

Each train of nozzles in a printhead has 2,560 nozzles.
Ink discharge nozzles are selected split in 40-, 20- or 10-nozzle blocks according to the Block Enable information in the even-numbered nozzle data and odd-num-
bered nozzle data.
Each selected block of nozzles is impressed with a Heat Enable signal generated with variable pulse widths according to the head rank, head temperature and printer
temperature for optimized ink discharges. The nozzles are driven by heater boards in the nozzles to discharge inks. Optimal nozzle blocks are selected according
to the print path.
The diagram below illustrates the relationship between a 40-block nozzle and nozzles driven.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Block No.

0
Printhead nozzle No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

2559
The pattern is repeated until 2560 nozzles is reached.
F-2-4

2-4
 Chapter 2

2. Print drive timing

Each printhead houses 12 trains of nozzles, which share the same data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
Even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV), odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD) and the Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) signal are generated for each
nozzle train and controlled individually.
Printing is carried out in two ways through reciprocating motion of the carriage.
An encoder sensor mounted on the carriage generates a 150-dpi-pitched linear scale detection signal (ENCODER_A) and a signal (ENCODER_B) shifted 120 de-
grees in phase. The direction of carriage motion is detected from the status of the ENCODER_B signal relative to the leading edge of the ENCODER_A signal.
The printhead is driven using a 2400-dpi timing signal (internal signal), which is generated by dividing the ENCODER_A signal detected at the 150 dpi timing into
16 equal sections.
Printing in the forward direction is triggered at the leading edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A).
Printing in the backward direction is carried out the same way as printing in the forward direction but at the trailing edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A),
when the order of heated nozzles is reversed depending on the sequence of transfer of even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.
150dpi

Linear scale

ENCODER_A

ENCODER_B

2400dpi

Internal signal

2400dpi

H0_CLK

H0_A_DATA_0_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22

H0_A_DATA_1_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22

H0_A_DATA_0_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22

H0_A_DATA_1_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22

H0_LT

H0_A_HE_1
Low active

F-2-5

2-5
 Chapter 2

2.2 Firmware

2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on

0012-6310

iPF810 / iPF820

The sequence of printer operations, from power-on to transition to online mode, is flowcharted below. The printer takes less than 1 minute to initialize itself(*).
* Excluding the times spent supplying inks and cleaning the printhead after leaving the printer for extended periods of time.

Power Button ON

Initialization of software
Device/resource Initialization of various devices
initializarion

Engine startup status check

Engine status check Previous power-off status check,etc.

Printhead installation status check

Printhead/ Ink tank installation status check
ink tank check EEPROM check

Cassette pick-up unit initialization

Media feed system Roll feed unit initialization
initialization Roll feed unit initialization
Sensor check

Recovery system return to origin

Recovery system Sensor check
initialization

Carriage motor return to origin

Carriage position
initialization

Remaining ink level detection/

Waste ink level detection

Power-on
automatic recovery operation

Capping

Waiting for print operation

F-2-6

2-6
 Chapter 2

2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off

0012-6311

iPF810 / iPF820

Turning off the power switch cuts off the drive voltage supply, launching a firmware power-off sequence as shown below.

If the power cord is disconnected from the wall outlet or the upper cover or any other cover is opend, the printer cancels the ongoing operation and shuts down
immediately. Since printhead capping may or may not have been carried out properly, reconnect the power cord to the wall out and turn on the power switch. Making
sure that the printer has entered online mode, turn off the power switch.

1. Power-off sequence

Hold down for at least once second

Power button OFF

If media remains,it is ejected even

Media ejection
when printing is in progress.

Power-off automatic recovery

Capping

Sensor system power OFF

Writing to EEPROM
Backup of various data

Power-off
F-2-7

2-7
 Chapter 2

2.2.3 Print Control

0020-5482

iPF810 / iPF820

1. Print mode
This printer is capable of fast, high-quality printing without blur and non-uniform density by changing the carriage operation, media feeding, other printing methods
according to the selected media type, print quality, print data and so on.
Printing is performed for each color using a maximum of 16 paths in each print mode according to the selected print quality.
This reduces density irregularities caused by the variation in the amounts of ink discharged from individual nozzles. In addition, it shifts the printing timing so that
the current ink layer is nearly fixed before the next ink layer is applied, thus minimizing bleeding.
Even in the same mode, the printer operates in a different way depending on the media setting made using the printer driver.

a) Draft mode
In the draft mode, image data is thinned out and a single band (equivalent to the width of a nozzle array) is printed using two paths.
To use this mode, select "Draft" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.

b) Standard mode
In the standard mode, a single band (equivalent to the width of a nozzle array) is printed using 4-8 (4, 6, or 8) paths.
To use this mode, select "Standard" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.

c) High quality mode

In the high quality mode, a single band is printed using 8 or 12 paths.
To use this mode, select "High" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.

d) Highest quality mode

In the high quality mode, a single band is printed using 12 or 16 paths.
To use this mode, select "Highest" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.

T-2-1

Printing Modes

2-8
 Chapter 2

T-2-2

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Plain Paper/ Plain Paper/Recycled Paper Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Recycled Paper
Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Plain Paper (High Quality) Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Plain Paper (High Grade) Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Economy Bond Paper Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Universal Bond Paper Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Standard Paper 1569B 80g Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Standard Paper 1570B 90g Office Document Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK

Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

2-9
 Chapter 2

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Coated Paper Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Heavyweight Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Premium Matte Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Recycled Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Colored Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Premium Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
LightWeight Coated Paper J80270 90g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
High Resolution Barrier Paper 180g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Matt Coated Paper 9171 120g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Extra Matt Coated Paper 7215 180g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Opaque Paper White 120g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Matt Coated Paper 140g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Photo Realistic Paper 210g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
LightWeight Coated Paper J80270 90g Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

2-10
 Chapter 2

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper 2 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Heavywght SemiGlos Photo Paper 2 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Poster Semi-Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Premium RC Photo Luster , 10 mil Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Instant Dry Papers Glossy 200g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Instant Dry Papers Satin 200g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper High Glossy 250g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper Semi Matt 250g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper Satin 240g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Photo Paper Pearl 260g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK

2-11
 Chapter 2

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Art Paper Fine Art Photo Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Textured Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Canvas Matte Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Block Print Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fine Art Watercolor Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Japanese Paper Washi Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Graphic Matte Canvas Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Art Paper Smooth 225g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Art Paper Embossed 225g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Art Paper Extra Smooth 250g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Water Resistant Paper Art Canvas Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Proofing Paper Proofing Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Professional Proof and Photo Glossy 195g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Professional Proof and Photo Semiglossy Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
195g High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Professional Proof and Photo Semigloss Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
255g High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Film Paper Backlit Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Backprint Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Outdoor Backlit (Durable Backlit Film/ Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
9578) High 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Pop-up Gloss Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
High 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Universal Opaque White Film Image Standard 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
High 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK

2-12
 Chapter 2

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
Matt Film Scrim Banner 370g Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Paper High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Adhesive Matt Stretch Vinyl Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Thin Fabric Flame-Resistant Cloth Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Banner High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Fabric Banner Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Thin Fabric Banner Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Synthetic Paper Synthetic Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Adhesive Synthetic Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Outdoor Polypropylene (Durable Banner) Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Adhesive Matt High Resolution Graphic Paper Self ADH Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Paper High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
CAD CAD Tracing Paper Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
CAD Clear Film Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
CAD Translucent Matte Film Line Document/ Draft 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

2-13
 Chapter 2

Print
Print Print- Used BK
Media Type Print Priority Printing Direction Resolution
Quality Pass ink
(dpi)
SPECIAL SPECIAL 1 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 2 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 3 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 4 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 5 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 PBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 PBK
SPECIAL 6 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 7 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 8 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 9 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
SPECIAL 10 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK
Highest 16 Bi-directional 2400x1200 MBK

2-14
 Chapter 2

2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function

0012-6313

iPF810 / iPF820

This printer supports a print position adjust the vertical and horizontal print position and the bidirectional print position of the print head mounted on the carriage
and the feedrate.
Print position adjustment work in two modes: automatic adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns printed are detected by a multi sensor attached to
the lower left part of the carriage, and manual adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns that are slightly modified from one another are printed, so
that visually verified adjustment values can be set from the operation panel.
To make print position adjustment, A3-or-larger-sized roll media or cut media are needed.

2.2.5 Head Management

0012-6314

iPF810 / iPF820

This printer supports a nozzle check function to spot non-discharging nozzles in the printhead.
When the printer detects a non-discharging nozzle. it starts cleaning the printhead automatically to correct its discharge failure. If cleaning does not work, the printer
backs up the non-discharging nozzle with an alternative nozzle automatically to ensure unfailing print performance.
Detection timings (automatic):
Power-on, carriage cover open detection, print start (check timing variable by selecting Nozzle Check from the system menu).

2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control

0012-6315

iPF810 / iPF820

When an abnormal temperature rise in the printhead is detected, overheating protection control launches.
Overheating could occur in the printhaed after a spell of print operations without the nozzles being filled with inks.
Overheating protection control is implemented on the basis of the temperature detected by the head temperature sensor for each nozzle. When an abnormal temper-
ature is detected in any nozzle train, overheating protection control is exerted at one of two levels according to that temperature.

Protection level 1:
If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the protection temperature, it halts the carriage temporarily at the scan end position in
the direction of travel according to the carriage scan status.
Printing resumes when the printhead radiates naturally to cool down to below a predetermined temperature or when 30 seconds or longer have elapsed since the
detection of the temperature higher than the protection temperature.

Protection level 2:
If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the abnormal temperature, the printer shuts down the print operation immediately,
moving the carriage to the home position for capping, with an error indication on the display.

2.2.7 Pause between Pages

0012-6320

iPF810 / iPF820

An inter-page function is available to prevent ink rubbing, which keeps paper just printed hanging above the platen and waiting for a predetermined period of time
before delivery.
The wait time is user-programmable from the print driver. This feature is particularly useful on paper that takes time to dry after printing, such as films.

2.2.8 White Raster Skip

0012-6322

iPF810 / iPF820

This printer supports a white raster skip function to bypass carriage scanning in a consecutive sequence of voids in print data for added throughput.

2.2.9 Sleep Mode

0012-6324

iPF810 / iPF820

The printer has sleep mode to save on its standby power requirement.
The printer transitions to sleep mode automatically when it has been left idle or no print data has been received for a predetermined period of time while the printer
is online or offline.
The printer exits sleep mode when any operation panel key is activated or print data is received from the host computer.
The time to transition to sleep mode is variable from the operation panel (Default: 5minutes).

2.2.10 Hard Disk Drive

0013-9239

iPF810 / iPF820

This printer features a hard disk drive, which provides the following functions.
- Early release of the host computer
- Error recovery
- Job preservation
- Preserved job print
- Job queue handling

1) Early release of the host computer

Each print job received from the host computer is preserved to the hard disk drive attached to the printer, so the printer can proceed with independent printing,
releasing the host computer before the print job completes.

2) Error recovery
If a print job aborts as a result of any print problem, such as a paper jam or insufficient paper, the printer reloads the print job stored on the hard disk so it can resume
the print job without having to retransmit the job from the host computer to it.

2-15
 Chapter 2

3) Job preservation
Print jobs are in the common box, a place of temporary data storage, and in the personal box, a place of permanent data storage.
Normal print jobs are stored in the common box as they are received. Due to the limited hard disk space available, jobs stored in the common box are deleted from
the oldest one in sequence.
Print jobs can be simply stored in the personal box without printing. Print jobs stored in the common box can be moved to the personal box.

4) Preserved job handling

Print jobs stored in the personal box or common box can be printed from the operation panel.

5) Job queue handling

Multiple jobs queued for print can be handled. including the raising priority order of selected jobs in the queue or canceling selected print jobs.

2-16
 Chapter 2

2.3 Printer Mechanical System

2.3.1 Outline

2.3.1.1 Outline
0020-5485

iPF810 / iPF820

The mechanical components of the printer can be broadly divided into an ink passage and a paper pass.
The ink passage consists mainly of ink tank assembly [1] and a printhead mounted on carriage unit [2], purge assembly [3] and maintenance cartridge [4]. Its func-
tions are to supply, circulate and suck inks and more.
The paper pass comprises an feed assembly [5], upper roll media pick-up assembly [6], a lower roll media pick-up assembly [7] and more to feed paper in three
different ways, and transport and eject the paper.
(lower roll unit is iPF820 only.)

A summary description of each mechanical component is given below.

[1]
[5] [2]

[3]
[6]

[4]
[7]

F-2-8

2-17
 Chapter 2

2.3.2 Ink Passage

2.3.2.1 Ink Passage
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage
0020-5486

iPF810 / iPF820

The ink passage houses the ink tank, printhead, caps, maintenance jet tray, maintenance cartridge, waste ink collector, ink tubes interconnecting the mechanical
units, suction pump driven mainly for sucking inks and so on. Its functions include supplying, circulating and sucking inks.

The ink passage (per color) is schematically shown below, along with the ink flow.

Mechanical Drive Unit

Ink or air flow
Carriage unit

Printhead Joint

Ink tank
Cap

Needle(ink supply) Needle(air passage)

Suction pump
Ink supply vavle

Piston
Agitation fin
Joint

Valve Agitation Sub buffer

motor cam

Maintenance cartridge
F-2-9
a) Supplying inks from the ink tanks to the ink supply valve assembly
The ink tanks each contain an ink to feed the printhead.
Head differences allow the inks to flow from the ink tanks to the subtanks first, then to the ink supply valves.
Air is discharged through the air passage of the subtanks to keep the internal pressure of the ink tanks constant.

b) Supplying inks from the ink supply valves to the printhead

The ink stored in an ink tank flows to the printhead when the suction pipe is driven with the ink supply valve opened and the head capped.
c) Supplying inks while printing
The ink supply valves are kept open while printing, so that inks are constantly feeding to the printhead under the negative pressure of the nozzle assembly caused
by discharging inks.
Further, waste inks sucked in a cleaning operation and inks from the maintenance jet tray flow into the maintenance cartridge.

Opening all the ink passages (by opening both the ink supply valve and the printhead fixer lever with an ink tank yet to be installed) while an ink tube is filled with
an ink could cause the ink in the ink tube to flow backward due to a head difference, leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank.
As a precaution, never open all the ink passages at the same time while the ink tubes are filled with inks.

d) Ink agitating
Ink will be agitated to prevent the element of the pigment ink from subsiding in the ink tank and the sub-tank.
The drive of valve motor is transmitted to the agitation cam, the agitation fin in a sub-tank rotates and ink in a sub-tank will be agitated. In addition, ink flows
backward by moving the piston under the needle(ink supply) up and down in the ink tank, and ink in the ink tank will be agitated.

2-18
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit

2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit
0020-5487

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Ink tanks
The ink level in each ink tank is memorized in EEPROM attached to the tank and is detected as a dot count on the basis of the EEPROM information.
When an electrode attached to a hollow needle detects no continuity, it displays a message reporting that the ink tank is nearly empty.
If the dot count reaches a predesigned value in this state, an ink out condition is assumed.

b) Ink port
Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause would cause a hollow needle to pierce the ink tank port sealed by a rubber plug, linking the ink passage
of the ink to the printer.

c) Air passage
Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause an open hollow needle to pierce the air passage sealed by a rubber plug releasing the internal pressure
of the ink tank to keep it constant.

d) Notches for preventing incorrect installation

Ink tanks are furnished with a notch for preventing incorrect installation.
If the installation of an ink tank in incorrect position is attempted, the notch would interfere with it, preventing its installation.
The ink tank fixer lever won't lower without the ink tank fully inserted to reach the mounting position, so the ink cannot be supplied.

[4] [3]

[2]

[5]

[1]

[5]

F-2-10
T-2-3

[1] Ink tank [4] Air passage

[2] EEPROM [5] Notch for preventing incorrect installation
[3] Ink port

2-19
 Chapter 2

e) Subtank
The subtank installed under each ink tank complements the work of the ink tank, agitating the ink in the tank.
If the ink tank runs out of the ink while printing, the ink stored in the subtank is available, allowing the ink tank to be replaced without having to stop printing.

f) Ink supply valves

Located halfway between each subtank and the ink tube, the ink supply valve prevents ink leaks that may occur when the ink tube on the ink tank is released during
replacement of the ink tank.
The ink supply valve is opened and closed by a valve open/close mechanism.
The ink tank unit consists of a tank base into which five-color ink tanks are assembled, and ink tubes for six colors (two occupied by MBK). Each color-specific
ink supply valve is linked to the action of a valve cam so the ink supply valves will open and close simultaneously for all the colors.

[1]
[2]

[3]

[4]

[9] [8] [7] [6] [5]

F-2-11
T-2-4

[1] Agitation cam sensor [6] Ink supply valve

[2] Valve motor [7] Link
[3] Valve open/closed detection sensor [8] Valve cam
[4] Agitation cam [9] Ink discharge tube
[5] Ink tube

2-20
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit

2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit
0020-5488

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Printhead mounting function

The carriage, which fixes the printhead in position mechanically, is connected to the contact of the head relay PCB.
b) Control function
The carriage carries a carriage relay PCB, which relays drive signals from the main controller PCB, a head relay PCB,which relay printhead drive signals to print-
head, a linear encoder, which generates print timing signals, and a multi sensor, which detects the width of paper and skews in it, adjusts is registration and head
height.
The carriage relay PCB is connected to the main controller PCB by a flexible cable.

c) Carriage drive function

The carriage is caused to reciprocate level on the platen by means of the carriage belt that is driven by the power imparted from the carriage motor.

d) Printhead maintenance function

This printer performs cleaning operations, such as wiping the printhead and sucking inks, with the carriage halted at its home position.

e) Nozzle check function

This printer carries out an ink discharge operation with the carriage halted at the head management sensor, locating a non-discharging nozzle in the printhead.

f) Carriage height adjustment function

If the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper (carriage height) is varied as a result of differing paper thicknesses, cockled or curled paper or other
problems, the printer is liable to mist generation as the carriage height increases or to head rubbing as the carriage height decreases.
To maintain an acceptable carriage height, the lift motor is driven according to the selected paper type, feeding method, print conditions (borderless printing/prior-
itized picture quality) , environmental condition(temperature/humidity) and multi sensor measurements to automatically adjust the separation between the face of
the printhead and the paper

The table below shows the relation between the form kind and the height of the head.

T-2-5

Height of printhead
Media type Remarks
(mm)
1.3 (Lowest) Photopaper, Synthetic paper, Film, Plain paper(Line drawing) Capping position
1.8 (Low) Coated paper(Line drawing)
2.0 (Standard) Plain paper, Coated paper, Fabric banner
2.2 (High) Premium matte paper, Fine art(watercolor,block print)
2.6 (Highest) Canvas

g) Paper leading edge detection function/paper width detection function/skew detection function
The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage detects the leading edge and width of paper feeding on the platen and skews in it.
h) Automatic printhead position adjustment function
The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage reads an adjustment pattern printed on a form and adjusts the print timing of each printhead automat-
ically.

i) Remaining roll media detection function

The printer prints a bar code on roll media upon delivery. The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage indicates the remaining volume of roll media.

j) Internal unit temperature sensor

A thermistor installed on the head relay PCB detects the internal unit temperature near the printhead.

2-21
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit

0020-5492

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Printhead mount
The printhead is secured to the carriage by the printhead fixer cover and the printhead fixer lever.
When the printhead is secured to the carriage, the signal contact of the head relay PCB is pressed against that of the printhead to convey print signals.
Further, the ink passage from the ink tanks is connected to the printhead via the ink tubes.

b) Ink port
Ink is supplied to the printhead via an ink tube, which runs between the tube guides via joints to reach the carriage and follows up is motion.

[3]

[4]

[7]
[2]

[6] [5] [1]

F-2-12
T-2-6

[1] Linear scale [5] Carriage

[2] Printhead fixer lever [6] Ink tube unit
[3] Printhead fixer cover [7] Carriage motor
[4] Electrical contact

c) Controller
The Carriage relay PCB is connected to the head relay PCB by means of a short flexible cable.
The flexible cable between the main controller and the carriage relay PCB follows up the motion of the carriage together with the tube guide.
A photocoupler encoder mounted in the lower part of the back of the carriage detects a linear scale reading as the carriage moves.

d) Carriage drive
Mechanical misregistrations in the vertical/horizontal and bidirectional print positions of the printhead mounted can be corrected by selecting Adjust Printer from
the main menu to shift the print timing.
A DC-operated carriage motor drives the carriage reciprocally on the platen by way of the carriage belt.
The carriage home position, or the capping position, is detected by the sensor flag on the right side of the carriage and the photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor
on the right side of the printer. When the linear scale position is set as a reference home position for use in subsequent position control operations, the carriage motor
is driven by a control signal generated from the main controller PCB.

e) Printhead maintenance unit

This printer cleans the printhead with the carriage halted at its home position.
Wiping takes through the rotation of the motor.
Wiper blades mounted on the carriage wipe the printhead while the carriage is halted at its home position.
Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance, whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber
impregnated with glycerin.
Maintenance jet ejection is carried out on the cap, at the maintenance jet tray, borderless printing ink tray and on the paper surface.
A suction operation is carried out by a suction cap in the purge unit.

f) Carriage height adjustment unit

The head height is adjusted with the carriage halted at its home position.
The lift motor is driven to rotate the lift shaft within the carriage, in sync with which the lift cams on both sides of the carriage move the head holder up and down,

2-22
 Chapter 2

thereby varying the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper.
The printhead height is detected from the lift cam sensor within the carriage and the distance of rotation of the lift motor.

g) Multi sensor
The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage consists of four LEDs (red, blue, green, infrared) and two light-receiving sensors to detect the leading
edges and width of paper and skews in it, and to adjust its registration and head height.
The multi sensor reference has a white plate attached to it, so that a reference value can be calculated during carriage height measurement by measuring the intensity
of light reflected upon the white plate.
(Service mode: SERVICE MODE>ADJUST>GAP CALIB.)

h) Rail cleaner
The shaft cleaner located in the right side of the carriage helps keep the main rail clean.

i) Internal unit temperature sensor

One thermistor is installed on the head relay PCB on the back of the head holder to detect the internal unit temperature.

[1] [8]

[2]
[7]

[3]

[6]

[4]

[5]

[10] [9] [13] [14]

[14]
[11] [12]

F-2-13
T-2-7

[1] Carriage relay PCB [9] Multi sensor reference plate

[2] Head relay PCB [10] BP maintenance jet tray
[3] Slant adjustment lever [11] HP maintenance jet tray
[4] Printhead fixer lever sensor [12] Head management sensor
[5] Multi sensor [13] Carriage HP sensor
[6] Shaft cleaner [14] Lift cam sensor
[7] Lift cam [15] Lift motor
[8] Linear encoder

2-23
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.4 Printhead
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead
0013-8015

iPF810 / iPF820

Each printhead is an integrated assembly of six trains of nozzles. Capable of controlling each nozzle individually, each printhead implements discharge control for
six colors by itself.

a) Nozzle arrangement
The nozzle assembly is formed of 1,280 nozzles arranged at 600-dpi intervals in a zigzag pattern, offering a total of 2,560 nozzles 1,200-dpi intervals.

5/600inch

0 0 0 0 0 0 1/1200inch
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3

2556 2556 2556 2556 2556 2556

2557 2557 2557 2557 2557 2557
2558 2558 2558 2558 2558 2558
2559 2559 2559 2559 2559 2559

82/600inch

F-2-14
b) Nozzle assembly structure
Inks supplied from the ink tanks are filtered through a mesh ink filter before being sent to the nozzle assembly.
Each nozzle train is supplied with an ink from the common nozzle chamber.
A head drive current subsequently flowing through the nozzle heater boils the ink, generating bubbles to discharge ink drops from the nozzle assembly.

Resin

Sillicon plate

Heater Heater
Shared ink chamber
F-2-15

2-24
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.5 Purge Unit

2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit
0020-5700

iPF810 / iPF820

To maintain high print quality, the purge unit performs maintenance of the nozzles o the printhead.
The purge unit supports a capping function, cleaning function, and ink supply function.

a) Capping function
The capping function presses the cap of the purge unit against the face plate on the nozzle section of the printhead to prevent nozzle drying and dust adhesion.
Capping is performed when printing is complete, at the start of the suction operation, and when switching to the standby state due to an error.
The capping function also establishes the ink passage between the printhead and purge unit.

b) Cleaning function
The cleaning function restores the printhead to the state where ink can be easily discharged from nozzles. This function includes the following three types of oper-
ations.

- Wiping operation
This operation is performed to remove paper fibers and dried ink from to the face plate.

- Pumping operation
This operation is performed to remove ink from the nozzles and fill the nozzles with fresh ink.

- Maintenance jet operation

This operation is performed to spray ink from the nozzles to the cap, HP maintenance jet tray, BP maintenace jet tray, maintenance jet ink groove of the platen to
remove bubbles in the nozzles and dust and other foreign particles.
c) Ink supply function
The suction pump of the purge unit operates together with the ink supply valve to supply ink to the printhead during the initial filling and ink level adjustment.
Details of the cleaning function are shown in the table below.

T-2-8

Name of Service mode

Cleaning mode or PRINT INF Operation Description of cleaning
(Name of Main Menu)
Cleaning 1 CLN-A-1/CLN-M-1 Normal cleaning Removes dried ink from nozzles, thick ink accumulated on the
(Head Cleaning A) face, and paper particles.
Cleaning 2 CLN-A-2 Ink level adjustment and cleaning Adjust the ink level in the head by suction, and then performs
normal cleaning.
Cleaning 3 CLN-A-3 Initial filling ink Fills the empty tube (during initial installation) with ink, and
then performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 4 CLN-M-4 Ink drainage for head replacement Drains ink to replace the head (drains only the ink in the head).
(Replace P.head)
Cleaning 5 CLN-M-5 Ink drainage for secondary transport Drains ink from the head and tube for secondary transport.
(Move Printer)
Cleaning 6 CLN-A-6/CLN-M-6 Normal (strong) cleaning Performs suction stronger than when adjusting the ink filling
(Head Cleaning B) amount in the head or normal cleaning to unclog nozzles.
Cleaning 7 CLN-A-7 Aging Performs idle ejection after replacement of the head.
Cleaning 10 CLN-A-10 Ink filling after secondary transport Fills the empty tube (during installation after secondary
(Move Printer) transport) with ink, and performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 11 CLN-A-11 Ink filling after head replacement Performs normal cleaning after head replacement and ink
filling.
Cleaning 15 CLN-A-15 Dot count suction Performs suction to remove ink adhered to dried nozzles and
thick ink accumulated on the face when the dot count reaches
the prescribed value.
Cleaning 16 CLN-A-16 Precipitated ink agitation Performs the agitation (ink supply valve open/close) operation
to prevent the ink ingredient from precipitating.
Cleaning 17 CLN-A-17 Cleaning (weak) Performs cleaning weaker than normal cleaning to unclog
nozzles.

2-25
 Chapter 2

Cleaning operation timings are as follows.

Consumption
Printer status Cleaning operation
(typ.)*1
Standby 168 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Cleaning)
At least 720 to 960 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 10 (480 hours after Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
initial installation) (strong) Cleaning)
At initial installation and 96 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16 Cleaning 16 -
(Precipitated ink
agitation)
1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
wiping
Power-on At initial installation Cleaning 3 (initial filling 40g
ink)
Both heads and inks The print operation has completed. 168 to 720 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
available Cleaning)
At least 720 to 960 hours elapsed Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
since the last session of Cleaning 2, (strong) Cleaning)
3, 6 or 10 (360 to 480 hours after
initial installation)
At least 960 to 2160 hours elapsed Cleaning 2 (Ink level 10g
since the last session of Cleaning 2, adjustment and
3, 6 or 10 (480 hours after initial cleaning)
installation)
At least 96 hours elapsed since the Cleaning 16 -
last session of Cleaning 16 (Precipitated ink
agitation)
At least 1 hour elapsed capped with Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
a specified number of dots
discharged per chip completed after
last wiping
Print operation aborted (uncapped) Up to 72 hours elapsed after an Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
and CR error occurring abort Cleaning)
Over 72 hours elapsed after an abort Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
(strong) Cleaning)
Print operation aborted (uncapped) and no CR error occurring Cleaning 11 (ink filling 10g
after head replacement)
No heads are available Cleaning 10 (ink filling 40g
on secondary transport)
Power off Specified number of dots discharged per chip completed since the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
Before the Less than 168 hours elapsed capped Idle ejection 0.013g
start of At least 168 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
printing Cleaning)
Before printing in the wake of an error occurrence Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Cleaning)
Printing Before scanning while printing Idle ejection (+Wiping) - (0.013g)
After the end A specified number of dots (color) discharged per chip since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 1 Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
of printing (strong) Cleaning)
A specified number of dots discharged per chip after the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
3 minutes elapsed since the last session of capping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
Total 2 hours elapsed uncapped since the last session of Cleaning 1, 2, 3, 6 or 10 Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Cleaning)
When the Manual Cleaning (Head Cleaning A) Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Head Cleaning)
Cleaning Manual cleaning (Head cleaning B) Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
menu choice (strong) Cleaning)
is executed
When the After head replacement Cleaning 2 (ink level 10g
Replace Print adjustment and
Head menu cleaning) + Cleaning 4
choice is (ink drainage for head
executed replacement)
When the After the Move Printer menu choice is executed Cleaning 5 (ink drainage 10g
Move Printer for secondary transport)
menu choice After power-on at secondary installation After power-on at 15g
is executed secondary installation

*1: Quantities of ink consumption by nozzle train

2-26
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit

0020-5494

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Caps
The caps cap the nozzle assembly in the left printhead during capping and cleaning. The part of the caps that comes into contact with the face plate of the nozzle
assembly is made of rubber. Two caps are in position to meet each of the printheads mounted on the carriage (six trains of nozzles).
The caps are activated to protect the nozzle assembly on capping. When the carriage moves to the home position , the caps are elevated by the cap can that is driven
by the capping motor, capping the nozzle assembly to protect it.
These caps cap the nozzle assembly to suck inks from the printhead by means of the suction pump.
b) HP maintenace jet tray
An HP maintenace jet tray is located at the home position of the platen, transporting idle discharges of the pigment and dye inks through their respective tubes to
the pump unit in the purge unit.

HP maintenance jet tray Carriage lock pin

Wiper unit
Pump cam sensor

Glycerin tank

Purge motor

HP maintenance jet
Pump encoder sensor pump encoder sensor

HP maintenance jet pump motor

F-2-16
c) Wipers
The wipers are driven by the purge motor to wipe the six trains of nozzles in the nozzle assembly in the printhead simultaneously.
A pair of wiper blades are in position to ensure wiping performance. The wiping operation operates on a slide wiping basis, sliding the wiper blades via wiper cams
through the normal rotation normal of the purge motor.
Wiping is executed by the wiper blades moving at a constant speed to the front of the printer after the end of a print or suction operation.
A wiper blade set perpendicularly to the head wipes the entire face of the printhead, followed by a narrower blade wiping the nozzle assembly.
The wiper blades are cleaned before they are replaced at the wiping position after wiping to preserve wiping performance.
Wiper blade cleaning is carried out by scraping off the inks that have been wiped off from the head with an ink scraper linked to the maintenance cartridge, then
wiping the blades with a blade cleaner.
Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance, whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber
impregnated with glycerin. The quantity of glycerin used is managed by counting the number of times the wiper blades have been pressed against the absorber.
When this count falls to equal any of the following values, either a replacement warning (continued print available) or replacement required indication (service call
error) is issued.
T-2-9

Display Times

Replacement warning indication 71,250 times

Service calls 75,000 times

Glycerin Ink scraper Printhead

absorber
Glycerin tank Wiper blades

Blade holder

Wiper cam
Cap
F-2-17

2-27
 Chapter 2

d) Pump
The pump is a tube pump that pressurizes the ink tubes with rotating rollers to produce a negative pressure for sucking inks. Each individual tube is sequentially
pressurized by two rotating rollers to control the rate of ink suction by a wide margin.
The rate of rotation of the rotating pumps is controlled by driving the purge motor or the HP maintenance jet pump motor as the timing at which the rotating pumps
rotate is detected by a pump cam sensor.

HP maintenance jet tray

Cap
Pump cam sensor

HP maintenance jet
suction pump
Suction
Suction pump
pump

Rotating Cap
rollers

Ink tubes

Purge motor

HP maintenance jet
pump motor
Pump encoder sensor HP maintenance jet
pump encoder sensor
F-2-18

2-28
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge

2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge
0020-5497

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Maintenance cartridge
The maintenance cartridge holds as much about 1000 mL of used inks.
b) Used maintenance cartridge ink detection
Used maintenance cartridge ink detection is monitored with regard to a dot count.
When the quantity of the used ink reaches about 800 mL (80% of the cartridge capacity), the warning message "Check maint cartridge capacity" is displayed to tell
that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full.
Printing may continue even when the warning message is displayed.
When the quantity of the used ink reaches about 1200 mL (about 1280 g, 100% of the cartridge capacity), a replacement prompt error message is displayed, telling
that the maintenance cartridge is full.
When the printer determines that the maintenance cartridge is full, it shuts down even while it is printing.
The printer will remain inoperable until the maintenance cartridge is replaced.

Memo:
The maintenance cartridge houses EEPROM, so that main controller PCB can control the status of the maintenance cartridge by writing to and reading from the
EEPROM content.
There is no need to initialize the counter information, therefore, when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.

Maintenance cartridge relay PCB

Maintenance cartridge

F-2-19

2-29
 Chapter 2

2.3.2.7 Air Flow

2.3.2.7.1 Air flow
0020-5500

iPF810 / iPF820

This printer is provided with four fans: two mist fans for collecting ink mist, a suction fan for allowing paper to be sucked onto the platen and a BP maintenance
jet suction fan for collecting idle discharges.
Ink mist floating during printing or springing back from the paper is collected by internal air flow in the printer into the mist fan unit through a mist suction opening.
The mist fan on the back of the printer produces the airflow that carries the ink mist to the mist fan unit.

F-2-20
A duct is located under the platen, along with a platen ink BOX unit used for collecting waste ink during borderless printing and idle discharges. The suction fan
collects the ink mist in the duct through a platen suction duct into the platen suction ink BOX unit.
Idle discharges to the BP maintenance jet tray are collected into the BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit and the filter by the BP maintenace jet suction fan.

Fan filter Fan filter

F-2-21

2-30
 Chapter 2

2.3.3 Paper Path

2.3.3.1 Outline
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path
0020-5503

iPF810 / iPF820

The paper pass comprises an upper roll media pick-up drive unit, a lower roll media pick-up drive unit, a feed roller, a pinch roller pressure drive unit that pressurizes
and depressurizes the pinch roller, a roll holder drive unit that drives the roll holder and sensors that detect the transport status of paper to feed paper in three different
ways, and transport and eject the paper.
(lower roll unit is iPF820 only.)

Roll media pick-up roller Media sensor

papar detection sensor
Printhead

Pinch roller

Cutter

Cut sheet
Feed roller

Pick-up roller

Roll media detection sensor

Flapper

Upper roll media

Lower roll media pick-up roller

paper detection sensor

Pick-up roller
Flapper

Lower roll media

Lower roll media detection

sensor
F-2-22

2-31
 Chapter 2

2.3.3.2 Paper Path

2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Pick-up/Feed Unit
0020-5505

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Roll media pick-up

The components of the roll media pick-up consists include a pick-up roller driven by a roll media pick-up motor, a roller that follows the motion of the pick-up
roller, a roll media pick-up roller clutch that controls the driving of the pick-up roller and a roll media pick-up cam clutch that controls the rise and fall of the roller.
When the roll media detection sensor detects a roll media being loaded at the paper loading port, the roll media pick-up motor (rotating in the normal direction),
the roll media pick-up roller clutch and the roll media pick-up cam clutch turn on respectively to rotate the pick-up roller. When the roll media thus fed is detected
by the roll media pick-up roller sensor, it is moved 5 mm before it comes to a standby position.
Pressing the [OK] button on the operator console turns on the flapper solenoid, with the pick-up roller and the feed roller carrying the paper to the platen for paper
sag correction, leading paper end detection, skew detection/correction, paper width detection and more. When the paper is carried to the feed roller, the roll media
pick-up motor, roll media pick-up roller clutch and roll media pick-up cam clutch turn off to release the pick-up roller.

b) Switching between upper and lower roll media pick-up

While a roll media has been carried to the platen, if the transport of a roll media from another roll media pick-up is specified, the roll media pick-up motor (rotating
in the reverse direction), the roll media pick-up roller clutch, the roll media pick-up cam clutch and the roll media rewinding clutch turn on respectively, driving
the pick-up roller, the feed roller and the roller holder to rewind the roll media from the platen to the standby position before the transport of a roller from the other
roll media pick-up specified starts.

c) Rewinding rolls
While a roll media has been carried to the platen, if the transport of a cut form is specified, the roll media pick-up motor (rotating in the reverse direction), the roll
media pick-up roller clutch, the roll media pick-up cam clutch and the roll media rewinding clutch turn on respectively, driving the pick-up roller, the feed roller
and the roller holder to rewind the roll media from the platen to the standby position.

d) Pick-up roller sag/skew correction

When a roll media feeds, it is iteratively driven and spooled about 75mm by the pick-up roller to correct sags and skews in the roll media. If the roll media width
detection sensor detects paper (media width: about 24 inches), the roll media pick-up pressure clutch turns on to actuate the torque limiter in the roll holder drive
unit, with the result of increased back tension (about 2.6 times higher than before). The increased back tension augments the effects of sag/skew correction on wide
media.

e) Skew correction on the platen

When a roll media feeds to the platen, it is carried in the direction of paper ejection for skew detection and correction. At this time, the pinch roller pressure motor
and the pinch roller pressure clutch turn on respectively to place the pinch roller in a weakly pressurized state (under about one third of the normal pressure), thereby
reducing paper nip force acting on the feed roller for enhanced skew correction.
The status of pinch roller pressure/release is detected by the pinch roller pressure detection sensor and the pinch roller release detection sensor, with the rate of
pressurization being controlled by drives from the pinch roller pressure motor.
Skew correction on the platen is run up to three times. If skews in the roller remain uncorrected after three runs of skew correction, the roll is subjected to user skew
correction (by releasing the release lever).

2-32
 Chapter 2

Pinch roller pressure Pinch roller pressure release shaft

detection sensor
Pinch roller release
detection sensor

Sensor
flag

Up
Down

Pinch roller
Pinch roller
pressure clutch
Pinch roller pressure motor

Flapper solenoid:ON
(During roll media loaded)

Flapper solenoid:OFF
(During cut sheet loaded)

Route of roll media

Flapper solenoid Flapper Route of cut sheet

Roll media pick-up

roller clutch Roller
Pick-up roller
Roll media Roll media pick-up cam
pick-up cam
clutch Roll media pick-up cam sensor

Roll media Rewind direction

pick-up motor
One-way gear Feed direction

Roll media rewinding clutch

Roll media pick-up
pressure clutch
F-2-23

2-33
 Chapter 2

f) Paper feed assembly

The paper feed assembly consists of paper feeding mechanisms, such as a feed roller that is driven by the feed motor and a pinch roller unit that follows up the
motion of the feed roller.
Paper feeds horizontally under the printheads on the carriage as it is kept level on the platen to prevent cockling.

Pinch roller Feed roller

Feed motor

F-2-24

2-34
 Chapter 2

2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit

2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit
0020-5538

iPF810 / iPF820

When a roll media is used, the cutter unit cuts the leading end of the roll on loading and also cuts the roller on paper ejection. Whether cutting takes place or not
depends on the relevant printer driver setting in the main menu.
The cutter in the cutter unit stands by at the cutter home position, except when a roll media is cut. Power imparted from the cutter motor to the cutter via a circular
belt drives it to travel from right to left for cutting.

Cutter

Cutter motor
Cutter left position sensor

Cutter HP sensor

F-2-25

2-35
 Chapter 2

2.4 Printer Electrical System

2.4.1 Outline

2.4.1.1 Overview
0020-5539

iPF820

The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and lower roll unit PCB and power supply PCB and hard disk drive which are mounted on the
back side of the printer, the carriage relay PCB, the head relay PCB, and printhead which are mounted in the carriage, the operation panel on the right upper cover
and other electrical components such as sensors, and motors.
The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system, and controls relay PCBs and driver functions.

Carriage relay PCB

Head relay PCB

Lower roll unit relay PCB Operation panel PCB

Lower roll unit PCB

Power supply PCB

Main controller PCB

HDD

F-2-26

2-36
 Chapter 2

Power supply PCB Main controller PCB

+26V generation function IC1501/IC1701
AC inlet
IC1601-IC1603
+21.5V generation function
Power supply control function

BAT801 IC601-IC604
SO-DIMM
Lithium battery SDRAM

IC803 IC802
RTC EEPROM

IC1
Host computer
Interface control function
Network Board

IC1201
HDD Hard disk drive control function
HDD controller
Linear encoder
Linear encoder detection function
sensor
Head relay PCB
Heat pulse control function
Printhead IC201
Image data control function
DI sensor reading
EEPROM
control function
IC701/IC703 FLASH ROM
Temperature reading Carriage
control function relay PCB

Operation panel control function Operation panel

Thermistor
PWM control function Fans
Multi sensor
EEPROM Multi sensor Remaining ink level
Ink tank ROM PCB
control function detection function

LED control function Maintenance cartridge

relay PCB

EEPROM control function IC1 EEPROM

Sensors

Lower roll unit PCB Sensor detection function

Lower roll unit relay PCB
IC1 Driver Solenoid/Clutch control function

IC2
Motor driver Motor control function

IC2700/IC2802
IC2900/IC2902
Motors IC3100/IC4501
IC4601/IC4602
Motor driver

Solenoids/ IC2700/IC4502
clutches Driver

F-2-27

2-37
 Chapter 2

2.4.1.2 Overview
0020-5544

iPF810

The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and media take-up relay PCB and power supply PCB and hard disk drive which are mounted on
the back side of the printer, the carriage relay PCB, the head relay PCB, and printhead which are mounted in the carriage, the operation panel on the right upper
cover and other electrical components such as sensors, and motors.
The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system, and controls relay PCBs and driver functions.

Power supply PCB Main controller PCB

Head relay PCB

Carriage relay PCB

HDD

Media take-up relay PCB

Operation panel PCB
Media take-up PCB

F-2-28

2-38
 Chapter 2

Power supply PCB Main controller PCB

+26V generation function IC1501/IC1701
AC inlet
IC1601-IC1603
+21.5V generation function
Power supply control function

BAT801 IC601-IC604
SO-DIMM
Lithium battery SDRAM

IC803 IC802
RTC EEPROM

IC1
Host computer
Interface control function
Network Board

IC1201
HDD Hard disk drive control function
HDD controller
Linear encoder
sensor Linear encoder detection function
Head relay PCB
Heat pulse control function
Printhead IC201
Image data control function
DI sensor reading
EEPROM
control function
IC701/IC703 FLASH ROM
Temperature reading Carriage
control function relay PCB

Operation panel control function Operation panel

Thermistor
PWM control function Fans
Multi sensor
EEPROM Multi sensor Remaining ink level
Ink tank ROM PCB
control function detection function

LED control function Maintenance cartridge

relay PCB

EEPROM control function IC1 EEPROM

Sensors

Media take-up PCB Sensor detection function

IC2700/
Media take-up Solenoids/
Solenoid/Clutch control function IC4502
relay PCB clutches
IC104 Driver
Motor driver Motor control function

IC2700/IC2802
Motors IC2900/IC2902
IC3100/IC4501
IC4601/IC4602
Motor driver

F-2-29

2-39
 Chapter 2

2.4.2 Main Controller

2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components

0020-5546

iPF810 / iPF820

IC802

IC601
IC3100 IC2802

IC602
IC4101

IC1 IC701 IC2700

IC603 IC2 BAT801

IC4601 IC4501
IC703
IC604 IC2900 IC4602
IC803 IC2902

IC1201

F-2-30
a) ASIC (IC1/IC2/IC401)
The ASIC(IC1/IC2/IC401) with a 32/16-bit internal bus is driven in sync with the 132/66 MHz external clock. It supports the following functions:
Image processing unit
This unit converts the RGB multi-value image data or CMYK multi-value data received from the host computer through the interface connector to the binary image
data for the ink colors used.

DMA controller
This controller control DMA transfer of the data transferred through the input interfaces such as the USB and expansion card slot as well as DMA transfer of the
data stored in the DIMM.

Image data generation/output function

This function generates image data for color printing from the received image data and the mask pattern (corresponding to print mode) stored in the FLASH ROM,
and stored the generated image data in DIMM. It also outputs the generated image data to the carriage PCB.
Interrupt controller
This controller receives and processes internal interrupts and external interrupts from the USB, image processing unit, and expansion card slot.
Timer function
Even when the printer is turned off, the timer function is held on using the RTC(IC803) and lithium battery(BAT801) to assist the cleaning function.
When the power cord is plugged to the outlet, power is supplied to the RTC and therefore the lithium battery power is not consumed.

Heat Enable signal control function

This function uses the pulse width to perform variable control of the time of application of the Heat Enable signal to the nozzle heater board for each printhead
nozzle array.

Linear scale count function

This function reads the linear scale when the carriage moves, thus generating the ink discharge timing. It also counts the linear scale timing cycle using the reference
clock to measure the carriage moving speed.

Dot count function

This function controls the discharge dots used as the information for Heat Enable signal control, maintenance jet control, cleaning control, and remaining ink level
for each nozzle array.

Operation panel control function

This function controls serial communication with the operation panel.

PWM control function

This function controls driving of the suction fan and mist fan as well as the temperature of the printhead.

Remaining ink level detection function

This function detects the remaining level of each color of ink based on the signal received from the hollow needle mounted in the ink tank unit.

LED control function

This function controls the LEDs on the ink tank unit.

I/O port function

This function controls input signals from sensors.

Power ON/OFF control function

This function controls turning on/off of the drive power (26 V and 21.5 V) supplied from the power supply PCB.

Head DI sensor read control function

This function controls read operation by the head DI sensor.

Multi sensor control function

This function controls the LED, adjusts the gain, and controls obtainment of the reading for the multi sensor.

EEPROM control function

This function controls the EEPROMs of individual ink tanks, the maintenance cartridge EEPROM, the EEPROM on the maintenance cartridge relay PCB, and the

2-40
 Chapter 2

head EEPROM in addition to the on-board EEPROM.

Clutch/Solenoid control function

This function controls the clutches and solenoids based on the control signal from the ASIC.

Motor control function

This function controls the carriage motor, feed motor, valve motor, purge motor and lift motor based on the input signals from sensors.

b) Driver IC (IC2700)
This IC generates a HP maintenance jet pump motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

c) Driver IC (IC2802)
This IC generates a feed motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

d) Driver IC (IC2900)
This IC generates purge motor and valve motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.

e) Driver IC (IC2902)
This IC generates a lift motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

f) Driver IC (IC3100)
This IC generates a carriage motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

g) Driver IC (IC4501)
This IC generates a pinch roller pressure motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

h) Driver IC (IC4601)
This IC generates a roll media pick-up motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

i) Driver IC (IC4602)
This IC generates a cutter motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.

j) DIMMs (IC601,IC602,IC603,IC604)
The DIMM comprising a 128-MB SDR-SDRAM is connected to the 32-bit data bus to be used as a work area.
During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.
It cannot be expanded.

k) FLASH ROM (IC701/IC703)

A 128-MB flash ROM is connected to the 8-bit data bus to store the printer control program.

l) EEPROM (IC802)
The 128-KB EEPROM stores various setting values, adjustment values, log data, counter values related to the user/servicing.

m) SO-DIMM
The 256-MB SO-DIMM (J401) is connected to the 32-bit data bus to be used as a work area.
During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.
It cannot be expanded.
n) HDD controller (IC1201)
This controller control the hard disk drive.

MEMO:
After replacement of the main controller PCB, the printer must be started up in the service mode to take over the setting and adjustment values to the new PCB
properly (the service mode will be switched to the PCB replacement mode automatically).

2-41
 Chapter 2

2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB

2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components

0020-5553

iPF810 / iPF820

F-2-31

a) Image data relay function

This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead.
The function for processing image data is not supported.
b) Sensor relay function
This function relays the input signals from the multi sensor, printhead fixer lever sensor, and linear encoder to the main controller PCB.

2.4.4 Head Relay PCB

2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components

0020-5555

iPF810 / iPF820

IC201

F-2-32
a) Latch IC (IC201)

DI sensor read control function

Obtains reading value of the DI sensor in the printhead and the head rank value for each color and outputs them to the main controller based on the control commands
from the main controller.

Environment temperature read control function

Outputs the environment temperature detected by the thermistor on the head relay PCB to the main controller based on the control commands from the main con-
troller.
Relay function of the power to the logic components in the printhead
Supplies the power to the logic components in the printhead based on the control commands from the main controller.

b) Multi sensor control

These IC's generates the LED control signals and makes gain adjustment for the multi sensor.

c) Image data relay function

2-42
 Chapter 2

This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead.

2-43
 Chapter 2

2.4.5 Motor Driver

2.4.5.1 Media take-up PCB components

0014-2480

iPF810

IC104

F-2-33
a) Driver IC (IC104)

Media take-up motor drive function

This function controls the Media take-up motor based on the control signals from the main controller.
Sensor relay function
This function relays the input signals from the Media take-up paper detection sensor and Media take-up on/off sensor to the main controller PCB.

2.4.5.2 Lower roll unit PCB components

0020-5556

iPF820

IC2

F-2-34
a) Driver IC (IC2)
The lower roll media pick-up motor is controlled on the basis of a control signal generated from the main controller PCB.
b) Clutch/solenoid control function
The clutch and solenoid are controlled on the basis of a control signal generated from the main controller PCB.

c) Sensor relay function

The sensor relay function transfers input signals from the sensors and switches to the main controller PCB.

2.4.6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB

2.4.6.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components

0013-6532

iPF810 / iPF820

IC 1

F-2-35
a) EEPROM (IC1)
The 128-KB EEPROM stores all information written in the EEPROM on the main controller PCB.

2-44
 Chapter 2

2.4.7 Power Supply

2.4.7.1 Power supply block diagram

0012-6414

iPF810 / iPF820

AC inlet
100V to 240V

Operation panel Main controller PCB Power supply

DC power supply +32V

POWER ON Noize filter circuit
control circuit generation circuit

Transformer

+5V/+3.3V +5.1V
generation circuit Rectifying circuit
generation circuit

F-2-36
The power supply converts AC voltages ranging from 100V to 240V from the AC inlet to DC voltages for driving the ICs, motor, and others.
The voltage generator circuits include the +32V generation circuit for driving motors, fans, and the +5.1V generator circuit for driving sensors, logic circuits.
When in the power saving mode, the power supply cut out the +32V and the +5.1V.
Power ON/OFF operation is controlled by the main controller PCB. When the upper cover is open, the power supply cut out only the +32V power to the carriage.

2-45
 Chapter 2

2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors

2.5.1 Sensors for covers

0020-5557

iPF810 / iPF820

Upper cover lock switch

Pinch roller pressure

release switch
Ink tank cover switch

Lower roll unit release detection switch

F-2-37
Upper cover lock switch (L) / (R)
The microswitch-based upper cover lock switches detect the open/closed states of the upper cover.
When the upper cover close, the switches are pressed to detect the closed state of the upper cover.
The printer has one switch installed on the left and right sides each to prevent one-sided closure of the upper cover.

Ink tank cover switch

The microswitch-based ink tank cover switch detects the open/closed states of ink tank cover.
When an ink tank cover closes, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the ink tank cover.

Pinch roller pressure release switch

The microswitch-based pinch rollerpressure release switch detects the status of the paper release lever.
When the paper release lever closes, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the paper release lever.

Lower roll unit release detection switch (L)/ (R)

The microswitch-type lower roll unit release detection switches detect the mounting of a lower roll unit in the printer. Mounting a lower roll unit in the printer
depresses the switches, causing them to detect the mounting of a lower roll unit.
The printer has one switch located on the left and right side each to detect with confidence that a lower roller unit is mounted in position.

2-46
 Chapter 2

2.5.2 Ink passage system

0020-5560

iPF810 / iPF820

Agitation cam sensor Valve open/closed detection sensor

Pump cam sensor

HP maintenance jet
Pump encoder sensor pump encoder sensor

Head management sensor

F-2-38
Pump cam sensor
As the cam rotates, it shields the sensor light of the photointerrupter-based pump cam sensor or allows it to be transmitted. the status of the purge unit, such as
capped, suction, and wiping, is detected in a Combination of the status of detection by the pump cam sensor and the control of pump motor rotation by the pump
encoder sensor.

Rotary flag Sensor

- Carriage lock - Capping - Air passage valve open - Printing

- Suction - Idle suction - Suction during printing

- Wiping - Carriage lock - Carriage move - Maintenance jet

- Air passage - Idle suction
F-2-39

2-47
 Chapter 2

Pump encoder sensor/HP maintenance jet pump encoder sensor

The photointerrupter-based sensor reads slits in the encoder film of the Purge motor/HP maintenance jet pump motor and controls the amount of its rotaion accord-
ingly.

Slits

Sensor
F-2-40
Valve open/closed detection sensor
The photointerrupter-based valve open/closed detection sensor detects the status of the valve.
The sensor detects that the ink supply valve is open when the sensor light is shielded by a flag linked with the valve cam.

Agitation cam sensor

The photointerrupter-based agitation cam sensor detects the status of the agitation cam.
The sensor detects the agitation cam home position when the sensor light allows it to be transmitted.

Ink detection sensor

The ink detection sensor detects the presence or absence of the ink in an ink tank with respect to the status of continuity between two hollow needles.
When the ink level in the tank falls to a point below the wall surrounding the hollow needles in the air passage, continuity with the hollow needle on the ink supply
side is disrupted, causing the sensor to detect that the ink is out.

Ink tank

Wall

Rubber plug

Needle (ink supply) Needle(air passage)

F-2-41
Head management sensor
The photo-transmission-type sensor detects that the printhead is discharging ink.
The carriage moves to and stops at the detection positions for individual nozzle arrays. When the carriage is at a stop, nozzles discharge ink on after another.
The sensor detects each nozzle due to the voltage change caused when ink discharged from the nozzle blocks the sensor light.

Non-discharging nozzle detection is carried out at the following timings:

- After the execution of Cleaning 1, Cleaning 2, Cleaning 3, Cleaning 6 or Cleaning 10
- After the number of copies that has been set by the user menu choice Nozzle Check Frequency have been printed
If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles have been located in one session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal cleaning sequence is
launched before a second session of non-discharging nozzle detection is conducted. If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles are located in the
second session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal (High) cleaning session is launched before a third session of non-discharging nozzle detection is
conducted.
If 30 or more non-discharging nozzles and less than 100 non-discharging nozzles per train are located as a result of the third session of non-discharging nozzle
detection, the print operation can resume after the message display as needed. If 100 or more non-discharging nozzles are located, a head replacement prompt
message is displayed.

Printhead
Nozzle unit

Head management
sensor unit

F-2-42

2-48
 Chapter 2

2.5.3 Carriage system

0020-5567

iPF810 / iPF820

Linear encoder sensor

Printhead fixer lever sensor

Multi sensor

Linear scale
Carriage HP sensor

Lift cam sensor

F-2-43
Printhead fixer lever sensor
The photointerrupter-type printhead fixer lever sensor detects the opening and closing of the printhead fixer lever.
When the printhead fixer lever is closed, the sensor arm shields the sensor light, causing the sensor to detect the closed state of the printhead fixer lever.

Carriage HP sensor
The photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor detects the home position of the carriage.
Installed on the right side plate of the printer, the sensor detects an edge of the carriage home position on the carriage unit under carriage unit under carriage move-
ment control.
The printer establishes the carriage home position from the position at which its edge is detected as a reference position.
Linear encoder sensor
Mounted on the back of the carriage, the linear encoder detects the position of the carriage from a slit in the linear scale during its movement.

Lift cam sensor

A photointerrupter-based sensor. After the sensor light is shielded by the flag, the lift motor is driven by a predetermined number of pulses to regulate the separation
between the printheads and platen automatically.

Ambient temperature sensor

The thermostat-based ambient temperature sensor mounted on the head relay PCB detects the ambient temperature to which the carriage is exposed.
The resistance of the thermistor that varies as a function of temperature changes in the printer is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage relay PCB.
The ambient temperature is used to help calibrate the head temperature sensor and detect abnormal ambient temperatures.

Head temperature sensor

2-49
 Chapter 2

The head temperature sensor detects the temperature of the printhead.

The printhead temperature is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage relay PCB.
The printhead temperature is used to help control the head drive and detect abnormal printhead temperatures.

Printhead contact detection

The printhead contact detects the status of printhead installation by electrical means.
The contact detects the status of contact from voltage changes in the flexible cables on the carriage side that come into contact with two terminals of the printhead
with remote contact surfaces, the power terminals and GND terminal.
Multi sensor
The photo-reflection-type multi sensor is composed of four LEDs (red, blue, green and infrared) and two light-sensitive sensors. It detects the leading edge, skewing,
and width of media and is used for adjustment of the registration, head height, and color calibration.
During head adjustment, the light reflected by the infrared LED and green LED is detected by two light-sensitive sensors to calculate the head height from the
difference between the measurements.

LED(blue) LED(green) LED(red)

Infrared sensor Infrared LED

Media

Platen
F-2-44

- Service mode: After SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB. has been carried out, pass paper to make sure that it is detected properly.

2-50
 Chapter 2

2.5.4 Paper path system

0020-5570

iPF810 / iPF820

Feed roller Pinch roller release

encoder sensor detection sensor

Feed roller HP sensor

Media sensor

Pinch roller pressure

detection sensor

Cutter HP sensor
Cutter left
position sensor

Roll media width detection sensor

(Lower roll media width detection sensor)
Roll media pick-up roller paper
detection sensor
(Lower roll media pick-up roller
paper detection sensor)

Roll media pick-up cam sensor

Roll media detection sensor
(Lower roll media pick-up cam sensor) (Lower roll media detection sensor)
F-2-45
Media sensor
The photoreflector-type media sensor detects the presence or absence of paper on the platen.
The sensor detects the presence of paper on the platen if it receives sensor light reflected upon the paper.

Roll media detection sensor/lower roll media detection sensor

The photoreflector-type roll media detection sensor and the lower roll media detection sensor detect the presence or absence of paper at the roll loading port. The
sensors detect the presence of paper if they receive sensor light reflected upon the paper.
Roll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor/lower roll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor
The photoreflector-type roll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor and the lower roll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor detect the presence or absence
of paper on the pick-up roller. The sensors detect the presence of paper if they receive sensor light reflected upon the paper.

Roll media width detection sensor/lower media width detection sensor

The photoreflector-type roll media width detection sensor and the lower roll media width detection sensor detect the presence of a wide roll. The sensors detect the
presence of a wide roll fed if they receive sensor light reflected upon the paper.

Roll media pick-up cam sensor/lower roll media pick-up cam sensor
The photointerrupter-type roll media pick-up cam sensor and the lower roll media pick-up cam sensor detect the pressurization of the pick-up roller when the pick-
up cam rotates to shield the sensor light.

Feed roller HP sensor

The feed roller HP sensor detects a reference white (transmitted) to black (shielded) transition from the encoder at power on and sets a home position for correcting
the eccentricity of the feed roller.

Feed roller encoder sensor

The feed roller encoder sensor detects the rate of paper transport per revolution of the feed roller from slits in the encoder during driving.

Pinch roller pressure detection sensor

2-51
 Chapter 2

The photointerrupter-type pinch roller pressure detection sensor detects the pressurization of the pinch roller if the pinch roller pressure cam rotates to shield the
sensor light.

Pinch roller release detection sensor

The photointerrupter-type pinch roller release detection sensor detects the depressurization of the pinch roller if the pinch roller pressure cam rotates to shield the
sensor light.
Cutter HP sensor
The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the cutter at the home (rightmost) position.

Cutter left position sensor

The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the cutter at the leftmost position.

2-52
 Chapter 2

2.5.5 Media take-up Unit

0013-8115

iPF810 / iPF820

Media take-up on/off sensor

OFF

ON

Media take-up
paper detection sensor

F-2-46
Media take-up on/off sensor
The photointerrupter-based media take-up on/off sensor detects the switch status of the media take-up unit.
When the media take-up switch is set to ON, the sensor arm transmits the sensor light, power-on the media take-up unit.
When the media take-up switch is set to OFF, the sensor arm shields the sensor light, shutting down the media take-up unit.

Media take-up paper detection sensor

When the sensor light is shielded by a loop of printed paper, the media take-up motor rotates to take up the paper.

2.5.6 Others
0020-5569

iPF810 / iPF820

Temperature/humidity
detection sensor

F-2-47
Temperature/humidity detection sensor
The temperature/humidity detection sensor detects the temperature and relative humidity around the printer to implement head height adjustment, maintenance jet
control, waste ink evaporation calculation and suction fan control on the basis of the temperature and relative humidity thus measured.

2-53
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
 Contents

Contents

3.1 Transporting the Printer .................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 Transporting the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ..................................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer..................................................................................................................................................................................3-13
 Chapter 3

3.1 Transporting the Printer

3.1.1 Transporting the Printer

3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer

0020-5610

iPF810 / iPF820

When transporting the printer, the printhead must be capped and stay in the carriage.
In spite of this precaution, shocks incurred during transportation can damage the printhead.
Print the nozzle check pattern before making preparations for transporting the printer, pint the nozzle check pattern again after installing the printer at the new lo-
cation, and then compare the two printouts.
If any problem such as nozzle clogging cannot be resolved by printhead cleaning, replace the printhead with a new one.

This section describes how to transport the printer.

The procedure depends on the mode of transportation. Select the appropriate transportation level from the following transportation modes.

1. Transportation mode
- Moving the printer on the same floor with no difference in grade (without tilting the printer): LEVEL 0
- Moving the printer on floor where there is difference in grade or by truck (by tilting the printer): LEVEL 1
- Moving the printer by plane or ship (tilting direction of printer is unpredictable): LEVEL 2
- Moving the printer in low temperature environment such as sub zero: LEVEL 2
- Moving the printer on its end: LEVEL 3

When lifting or moving the printer, be sure to hold the handle at bottom left and right of the printer. Holding the printer by its cover can deform the cover.

F-3-1

F-3-2

3-1
 Chapter 3

The printer main unit weights approximately 110 kg. When moving the printer, have at least six people hold it from both sides taking care not to hurt their back.

F-3-3
Do not place or transport the printer with load placed only at the center of the printer. Otherwise the printer can be deformed or damaged.

F-3-4
When tilting the printer, place a cardboard or blanket on the floor to prevent damage to the printer.

F-3-5

3-2
 Chapter 3

When tilting the printer, support the printer at bottom left and right side of the printer.
If the printer is supported at any other location, the printer may be damaged or deformed.

F-3-6

3-3
 Chapter 3

a. LEVEL 0
Moving the printer on the same floor without difference in grade
T-3-1

Item Description
[MOVE PRINTER] on the Main menu This need not be performed.
Allowed tilting angle Do not tilt.
Ink consumption No ink is consumed.
Ink tank It may be installed or removed.
Separation of main unit and stand They do not need to be separated.
Maintenance cartridge Install.
There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge.

Replacement of consumable parts There is no need to replace consumable parts.

Service support No service support is necessary.

Transportation procedure
1) Turn off the power and check that the heads are capped.
2) Open the upper cover and mount the belt stopper.

F-3-7

When mounting the belt stopper, be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure. If the carriage moves when the heads are capped, the rubber
part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and damage the print head.

3) Close the upper cover.

4) Remove the paper and roll holder.
5) Remove power cord and interface cable.
6) Unlock the casters on the stand and move the printer slowly.

If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.

3-4
 Chapter 3

b. LEVEL 1
Moving the printer on a floor with difference in grade or by truck
T-3-2

Item Description
[MOVE PRINTER] on the Main menu Perform [LEVEL 1].
Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise: -30 to +30 degrees

Rotation: -10 to +10 degrees

Ink consumption No ink is consumed.

Ink tank It may be installed or removed.
Separation of main unit and stand They do not need to be separated.
Maintenance cartridge Install.
There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge.
However, if there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink,
replace with new maintenance cartridge before transporting.

Replacement of consumable parts Replacement of consumable parts and resetting of counter may be necessary.
Service support If consumable parts must be replaced, service support is necessary.

Transportation procedure
1) If there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink, replace the maintenance cartridge.
2) Remove the paper and roll holder.
3) From [Main menu] > [Maintenance] > [MOVE PRINTER], select [LEVEL 1].
4) Press the [OK] key and perform [LEVEL 1] MOVE PRINTER.
5) If the consumable parts counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace
the necessary consumable part.
See "d. Replacing consumable parts during transportation."
Repeat [LEVEL 1] after replacing consumable parts and resetting the counter.
6) When MOVE PRINTER completed message appears, turn off the power, and remove the power cord and interface cable.
7) Open the upper cover and raise the ejection guide.

F-3-8

3-5
 Chapter 3

8) Remove the ejection support and lower the ejection guide.

F-3-9
9) Install the belt stopper.

F-3-10

When mounting the belt stopper, be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure. If the carriage moves when the heads are capped, the rubber
part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and damage the print head.

10) Close the upper cover.

11) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
12) Unlock the casters on the stand and move the printer slowly.

If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.

3-6
 Chapter 3

c-1. LEVEL 2
Transporting by plane or ship
Transporting in low temperature environment such as sub zero
T-3-3

Item Description
[MOVE PRINTER] on the Main menu Perform [LEVEL 2].
Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise: -30 to +30 degrees

Rotation: -30 to +30 degrees

Ink consumption Approximately 200ml of ink is consumed.

Ink tank Remove all ink tanks.
Separation of main unit and stand Separate.
Maintenance cartridge Install.
Have one new maintenance cartridge ready.
Replacement of consumable parts Replacement of consumable parts and resetting of counter may be necessary.
Service support If consumable parts must be replaced, service support is necessary.

3-7
 Chapter 3

c-2. LEVEL 3
Moving the printer on its end
T-3-4

Item Description
[MOVE PRINTER] on the Main menu Perform [LEVEL 3].
Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise: -90 to +90 degrees

Rotation: -30 to +30 degrees

Ink consumption Approximately 700ml of ink is consumed.

Ink tank Remove all ink tanks.
Separation of main unit and stand Separate.
Maintenance cartridge Replace with new maintenance cartridge before performing transporting procedure.
Three new maintenance cartridges must be provided.
(Two for disposing waste ink and one to be installed during transportation)
Replacement of consumable parts Replacement of consumable parts and resetting of counter may be necessary.
Service support If consumable parts must be replaced, service support is necessary.

Transportation procedure
1) If there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink, replace the maintenance cartridge.
2) Remove the paper and roll holder.
3) From [Main menu] > [Maintenance] > [MOVE PRINTER], select [LEVEL 2] or [LEVEL 3].
4) Press the [OK] key and perform [LEVEL 2] or [LEVEL 3] MOVE PRINTER.
5) If the counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace the necessary
consumable part.
See "d. Replacing consumable parts during transportation."
Repeat [LEVEL 2] or [LEVEL 3] after replacing consumable parts and resetting the counter.
6) Follow the displayed message and open the left and right ink tank covers.

[1]

F-3-11

3-8
 Chapter 3

7) Lift stopper [1] in the ink tank lock lever and raise ink tank lock lever [2] until it won't go farther and then push it to the front.

A A A A

B G
B
[2]

[1]
F-3-12
8) Remove all ink tanks.

A
A
[1]

GY
Y

MB
KBK

F-3-13

Put the removed ink tanks in the plastic bag with the ink supply part [1] upward and close the opening.

[1]

F-3-14

3-9
 Chapter 3

9) Depressing unlock lever [1], replace all ink tank lock levers softly in original position.

A
A

[1]

Y
GY
MB
KB
K

F-3-15
10) Close the ink tank cover.
Ink drainage is performed automatically. Replace the maintenance cartridge when the cartridge replacement message appears.
11) When MOVE PRINTER completed message appears, turn off the power, and remove the power cord and interface cable.

[1]

F-3-16
12) Open the upper cover and raise the ejection guide.

F-3-17

3-10
 Chapter 3

13) Remove the ejection support and lower the ejection guide.

F-3-18
14) Install the belt stopper.

F-3-19

When mounting the belt stopper, be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure. If the carriage moves when the heads are capped, the rubber
part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and damage the print head.

15) Close the upper cover.

16) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
17) If a basket is installed, remove the basket.
18) Remove the printer from the stand.
Hold the transporting handles at left and right bottom of the printer with three persons on each side and separate the printer from the stand.
19) Reverse the assembly procedure to disassemble the stand and media take-up unit as necessary and pack them.
20) Pack the printer and transport.

If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.

3-11
 Chapter 3

d. Replacing consumable parts during transportation

During [MOVE PRINTER], if a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace the necessary
consumable parts.
See "Service mode."
The consumable parts to be replaced and counter to be reset depends on the [LEVEL].

[5]

[3]

[4]

[4]

[2]

[1]
F-3-20
T-3-5

Service Mode Level x (Main

No Part number Name Q'ty
PARTS xx COUNTER x menu)
[1] QM3-4814 WASTE INK BOX UNIT (L) 1 A1 A 1, 2, 3
[2] QL2-2822 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT 3 A2/A3/A4
[3] QM3-4844 HEAD MANAGEMENT SENSOR UNIT 1 K1 K
[4] QM3-4846 MIST FAN UNIT 2 V1 V 3
[5] QM3-4911 INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT 1 If there is waste
ink, perform
waste ink
disposal or
parts
replacement.

3-12
 Chapter 3

3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer

3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer

0020-5722

iPF810 / iPF820

1. Installing after transporting by LEVEL 0 or LEVEL 1.

If ink drainage was not performed when transporting by LEVEL 0 or 1, remove the belt stopper and attach the power cord and interface cable after moving the
printer to the installation location, and then check the operation of the printer (with test pattern).
2. Installing after transporting by LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3.
If ink drainage was performed when transporting by LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3, follow the installation procedure which is nearly identical to the procedure when in-
stalling for the first time.
See "Installation" > "Unpacking and Installation" for the installation procedure.

3-13
 Chapter 3

3-14
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
 Contents

Contents

4.1 Service Parts...................................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Service parts................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...............................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly ...........................................................................................................4-2
4.3.1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.4 External Covers............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.5 Drive Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.3.6 Cutter.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.7 Carriage Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-20
4.3.8 Ink Tube Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-24
4.3.9 Pick-up/Feed Unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.10 Pick-up/Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.11 Purge Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-32
4.3.12 Waste Ink Collection Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.13 Ink Tank Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.3.14 Multi Sensor............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-45
4.3.15 Linear Encoder Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-48
4.3.16 Head Management Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-49
4.3.17 PCBs ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-50
4.3.18 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit................................................................................................................................ 4-51
4.3.19 Opening and closing ink supply valves ................................................................................................................................... 4-52
4.3.20 Draining the ink ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.4 Applying the Grease.....................................................................................................................................................4-54
4.4.1 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-54
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ........................................................................................................................................4-57
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-57
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ................................................................................................... 4-57
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder.......................................................................................... 4-57
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor......................................................................................................... 4-57
 Chapter 4

4.1 Service Parts

4.1.1 Service parts

0012-6508

iPF810 / iPF820

The service parts indicated below require careful handling.

1. Keep all packages with the warning not to turn over.

Pay careful attention to all individually packaged service part (carriage unit, purge unit, ink tank unit, and other parts) boxes marked "This side up" and handle
appropriately.

F-4-1
2. Feed roller
The feed roller is a functionally important part. Therefore, be careful that the roller is not scratched or marked during storage or transport of the service parts, when
removing them from the individual boxes, when assembling, or performing any other
operations.
For details about handling of the feed roller, refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Feeder unit a) Handling
of the feed roller.

4-1
 Chapter 4

4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly

4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly
0016-9451

iPF810 / iPF820

For the procedure for disassembly/reassembly of the components excluding the major components, refer to the parts catalog.
Illustrations in the parts catalog are assigned illustration numbers according to the order in which parts are disassembled.

4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly

4.3.1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly

0012-6514

iPF810 / iPF820

Assemblies that are prohibited from disassembly and their adjustment outside the factory cannot be conducted are indicated by red screws.
Don't never loosen or remove the red screw, because normal operation and print can't be done if it is loosened or removed.

F-4-2

4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually

0020-5644

iPF810 / iPF820
When moving the carriage, hold it by handle [1] shown below.

Move the carriage as required during assembly and disassembly to prevent the carriage from contacting the parts to be removed.
You cannot move the carriage when capping has been performed. Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly
> Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit to remove the caps, and then move the carriage.

[1]

F-4-3

4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink

0014-8953

iPF810 / iPF820

When disassembling the following units of the ink passage, drain the filled ink completely to prevent ink leakage. For how to drain the ink, refer to DISASSEM-
BLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the ink.
[1] Carriage unit
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Carriage unit.
[2] Ink tube unit
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink tube unit.

4-2
 Chapter 4

[3] Ink tank unit

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly >Ink tank unit.

4-3
 Chapter 4

4.3.4 External Covers

0020-5646

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Left circle cover (L)/Right circle cover (L)

Removing left circle cover (L)/right circle cover (L)
1) To remove circle cover (L) [1], insert flathead screwdriver [2] at the position indicated to remove claw [3] and turn the cover forward to remove.

[1]
[2]

[3]

F-4-4
Installing left circle cover (L)/right circle cover (L)
1) Install circle cover (L) [1] with its part [2] inserted in arrow mark [3] of the right side cover and turn the cover backward to install.

[3] [1]

[2]
F-4-5
b) Left circle cover (S)/Right circle cover (S)
Removing the left circle cover (S)/right circle cover (S)
1) Remove circle cover (S) [1] by turning it forward to remove the hook

[1]

F-4-6

4-4
 Chapter 4

Installing left circle cover (S)/right circle cover (S)

1) Install circle cover (S) [1] with its part [2] inserted in part [3] of the right side cover and turn the cover rearward to install.

[2]
[3]

[1]

F-4-7
c) Left/ right side covers
Removing the left/ right side covers
1) To remove left/ right side covers [1], remove left/ right circle cover (L) and left/ right circle cover (S).
2) Remove three screws [2] and two hooks [3], and remove the cover by their bottom side.

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-4-8

4-5
 Chapter 4

d) Operation panel
Removing the operation panel
1) To remove operation panel [1], open the upper cover and raise the ejection guides. Remove two claws [2] using a flat head screwdriver and release connector [3]
and ground wire [4].

[1] [2]
[4]

[3]

[2]
F-4-9
e) Upper left cover/upper right cover
Removing the upper left cover/upper right cover
1) To remove upper left/upper right cover [1], remove left/ right circle cover (L), left/ right circle cover (S) and left/ right side covers.
2) Insert a flathead screwdriver at the indicated position to remove hook [2].

[1]
[2]

F-4-10
f) Right front cover
Removing the right front cover
1) To remove right front cover [1], remove right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side covers, upper right cover the operation panel.
2) Remove two screws [2].

[2]

[1]
F-4-11

4-6
 Chapter 4

g) Left front cover

Removing the left front cover
1) Raise the ejection guides.
2) Remove screw [1] and hook [2] to detach left front lower cover [3].

[2] [1]
[3]

F-4-12
3) Remove two screws [1] to detach left front cover [2].

[1]
[2]

[1]
F-4-13
h) Rear cover right/Rear cover left
Removing the rear cover right/rear cover left
1) Remove the hook to remove accessory box [1].

[1]

F-4-14
2) To remove rear cover right [1], remove four screws [2].

4-7
 Chapter 4

3) To remove rear cover, left [3], remove the rear cover right and two screws [4].

[3]
[1]

[4] [2]

F-4-15
i) Lower rear cover, right/ left, filter cover
Removing the lower rear cover, right/ left, filter cover
1) To remove lower rear cover, right [1] , remove four screws [2].
2) To remove lower rear cover, left [3], remove two screws [4].
3) To remove filter cover [5], remove screw [6].

[5] [3] [1]

[6]

[4]
[2]
F-4-16
j) Ink tank cover units
Removing the ink tank cover units
1) To remove ink tank cover unit [1] , remove three screws [2], open tank cover [3] and remove two hooks [4].

[4]
[3]

[1]

[2]

[2]
F-4-17
k) Ink tank units
Opening the ink tank units

4-8
 Chapter 4

1) To open the ink tank units, remove right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side covers, upper right cover and right ink tank cover unit.
2) Remove two screws [1].
3) Remove two screws [4] from the support plate [3], and then loosen four screws [5] and slide the support plate to open the ink tank unit.

[3]
[2] [3]

[5]

[5]

[4] [4]
[1]
F-4-18
l) Left rear cover
Removing the left rear cover
1) Remove four screws [1] to remove left rear cover [2].

[1]
[2]

[1]
F-4-19

4-9
 Chapter 4

m) Ejection guides
Removing ejection guides
1) Raise the ejection guides.
2) Loosen screw [1] and slide it to left to tighten.
3) Remove ejection guide [2].

[1]
[2]

F-4-20
n) Upper rear cover
Removing the upper rear cover
1) To remove the upper rear cover, remove left/ right circle cover (L), left/ right circle cover (S), left/ right side covers , upper left/upper right cover, rear cover,
right/ left , and ink tank cover units and then open the ink tanks.
2) Remove two screws [1] on front side of the printer and three screws [2] on the rear side, and then remove upper rear cover [3].

[1]
[3]
[1]

[2]

F-4-21

4-10
 Chapter 4

Note on installing the upper rear cover

1) Fit three rear-panel screws [1] into screw holes on the right side.

[1]

F-4-22
o) Upper cover
Removing the upper cover
1) To remove the upper cover, remove left/ right circle covers (L), left/ right circle covers (S), left/ right side covers , upper left/upper right covers, rear cover left/
right , right cover unit and upper rear cover.
2) Remove upper cover [2] while opening left/right arm stays [1] outward one by one.

[1]

[3]
[2]

F-4-23

4-11
 Chapter 4

p) Cover stay unit (R)

Removing the cover stay unit (R)
1) Remove three connectors [1] to release the harness from the harness guide.

[1] [1]

F-4-24
2) Remove there screws [1] to remove spool holder (R) [2].

[2]

[1]

F-4-25
3) Remove two hooks [1] to remove spool holder from cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-4-26

4-12
 Chapter 4

4) Remove three screws [1] to remove cover stay unit (R) [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-4-27
q) Cover stay unit (L)
Removing the cover stay unit (L)
1) Remove five screws [1] to remove left rear support plate [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]

F-4-28

4-13
 Chapter 4

2) Remove two connectors [1] from the back of the printer to release the harness from the harness guide.

[1]
F-4-29
3) Remove screw [1] to remove left front inner cover [2].
4) Remove screw [3] to remove spool holder [4].

[4] [3] [1]

[2]
F-4-30
5) Remove screw [1] to remove cover stay unit [2].

[2]
[1]

[1]
F-4-31

4-14
 Chapter 4

r) Release lever
Removing the release lever
1) To remove release lever [1], remove the purge unit and then remove the release lever. To do so, keep pinch roller [2] pressurized to ease to work of phase align-
ment during gear installation.

Installing the release lever

1) Install the release lever with its gear being engaged with boss [3] (phase) of the recipient gear.

[2]

[3]

[1]

F-4-32

4-15
 Chapter 4

4.3.5 Drive Unit

0020-5659

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Feed motor
Removing the feed motor
1) To remove feed motor [1], loosen four screws [2] and remove timing belt [3] and spring [4].
2) Remove four loosened screws [2] to release feed motor [1] and remove the connector.

Reinstalling the feed motor

To reassemble the feed roller drive timing belt [3] into position, set the tension of timing belt [3] by adjusting the pressure of spring [4]. Then, fix feed motor [1].

[2] [3]
[1]

[2]

[2]
[4]
F-4-33
b) Action to take after replacing the feed roller encoder and feed roller
This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity (that is, variations in the rate of paper feed from rotation to rotation) corrected for enhanced media feed ac-
curacy. When the feed roller HP sensor or feed roller encoder and feed roller pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced, therefore,
they should require adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING
Media type: Glossy photo paper
If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual ad-
justment.
Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2
Media type: Gloss photo paper
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.

c) Carriage motor
Removing the carriage motor
1) Move the carriage onto the platen. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Opening the Cap and Moving the Wiper Unit."
2) Remove two screws [1] and connector [2] to remove carriage HP sensor assembly [3].

[1] [2] [3]

F-4-34

4-16
 Chapter 4

3) Twist off belt fixer knob [1] to loosen the carriage belt. Remove spring [2], guide [3] and pulley [4].

[4] [3] [2] [1]

F-4-35
4) Release the carriage belt from the carriage motor pulley.
5) Remove connector [1] and four screws [2] to remove carriage motor [3].

[1] [2]

[3]

[2]
F-4-36

4-17
 Chapter 4

4.3.6 Cutter
0020-5669

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing the cutter

1) Remove the ejection guides.
2) Remove screw [1] to remove gear cover [2]. Then, remove two screws [3] and connector [4] to remove cutter motor unit [5].

[3] [2] [1] [3]

[5] [4]
F-4-37
3) Remove four screws [4] to remove four guides [2].

[2]

[1]
F-4-38

4-18
 Chapter 4

4) Remove six screws [1] to remove cutter unit [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-4-39
5) Remove two screws [1] to remove cutter [2].

[2]

[1]
F-4-40

4-19
 Chapter 4

4.3.7 Carriage Unit

0020-5661

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing the carriage unit

1) Perform ink drainage. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Ink Drainage."
2) Turn off the power to move the carriage onto the platen. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Opening the Cap and Moving
the Wiper Unit."
3) Remove the printhead.
4) Disconnect ink tube [1] from guide [2], release spring [3] from two hooks [4] and remove joint base [5] together with the printhead fixer lever.

[5] [4] [1]

[3] [2]
F-4-41

Cover the joints in the ink tube, as with a PVC bag, to keep inks from splashing from them.

F-4-42

4-20
 Chapter 4

5) Remove two screws [1] to remove carriage upper cover [2].

[1] [1]

[2]
F-4-43
6) Remove three connectors [1].

[1]

F-4-44
7) Remove two screws [1] and connector [2] to remove carriage HP sensor assembly [3].

[1] [2] [3]

F-4-45

4-21
 Chapter 4

8) Twist off belt fixer knob [1] to loosen the carriage belt. Remove spring [2], guide [3] and pulley [4].

[4] [3] [2] [1]

F-4-46
9) Release the carriage belt from the carriage motor pulley.
10) Remove two screws [1] to remove pulley base [2].
11) Remove two screws [3] and two connectors [4] to remove lift drive unit [5].

[5] [2] [1]

[3] [4]
F-4-47
12) Remove screw [1] to remove stopper [2] and then release carriage unit [3] from the printer right side.

[3]

[1] [2]
F-4-48

4-22
 Chapter 4

b) Precaution in mounting the carriage unit

Make sure that linear scale [1] is seated in linear encoder sensor [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-49
c) Mounting the carriage belt
To install the carriage belt, put in the point of the belt to the interior of the groove [1], and have all the cogs of carriage belt [3] engaged with belt stopper [2].

[3] [2] [1] [2] [3]

F-4-50
d) Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor
When either carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced, be sure to replace the multi sensor reference plate(QL2-2840-000:MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REF-
ERENCE) as well.

e) Action to take after replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor
Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in each printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical
axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and sensor calibration adjusted prior to shipment. When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced,
they should require adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:

1) Optical axis correction

- Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS
Media type: Gloss photo paper

2) Paper gap adjustment

- Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.

4-23
 Chapter 4

4.3.8 Ink Tube Unit

0020-5666

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing the ink tube unit

1) Perform ink drainage. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Ink Drainage."
2) Turn off the power to move the carriage onto the platen. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Opening the Cap and Moving
the Wiper Unit."
3) Remove the printhead.
4) Disconnect ink tube [1] from guide [2], release spring [3] from two hooks [4] and remove joint base [5] together with the printhead fixer lever.

[5] [4] [1]

[3] [2]
F-4-51

Cover the joints in the ink tube with a PVC bag or the like to keep inks from splashing.

F-4-52

4-24
 Chapter 4

5) Remove two screws [1] to remove carriage upper cover [2].

[1] [1]

[2]
F-4-53
6) Remove three connectors [1].

[1]

F-4-54
7) Remove the PCB cover.
8) Remove three connectors [3] from the main controller PCB.

[1]

F-4-55

4-25
 Chapter 4

9) Remove two screws [1] to remove ink tube mount [2]. Then, remove four hooks [3] to remove two ink tube guides [4].

[2] [3]
[4]

[1]
[3]

F-4-56
10) Remove joint [1] of the ink tube unit to remove ink tube unit [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-57
b) Reassembling ink tube units
When the ink tube unit has been replaced, turn on the power without mounting the printhead and the ink tanks.
Then, mount the printhead and ink tanks as directed by message guidance.

After detaching the joint of the ink tube unit, the joint might become easy to come off by the ink that has adhered to it.
In that case, please wash the joint by alcohol and remove the adhering ink.

F-4-58

4-26
 Chapter 4

4.3.9 Pick-up/Feed Unit

0020-5705

iPF810

a) Removing the pick-up unit

1) Open the upper cover.
2) Raise the ejection guides.
3) Remove screw [1] to remove left front inner cover [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-59
4) Remove eight screws [1] and connector [2] and remove slide pick-up unit [4] by sliding it to the left to release the groove from two pins [3].

[3] [3]
[1]

[2] [1] [4] [1]

F-4-60

The pick-up unit weighs about 27kg. Use maximum care not to drop it or let it hit other objects.

4-27
 Chapter 4

b) Removing the pick-up roller

1) Remove the pick-up unit.
2) Remove screw [1], guide [2], two E-rings [3], gear [4], parallel pin [5], two bushings [6] and connector [7] to release harness from the harness guide.
3) Remove four screws [8] to remove upper unit [9] of the pick-up unit.

[4] [5]
[6]
[3]
[6]

[7]
[2]

[9] [1]
[3] [8]

[8]

F-4-61
4) Remove E-ring [1] and slide three upper pick-up guides [2] to the left to release from five hooks [3] each, removing them from the leftmost one in sequence.

[3]

[3] [2]

[1]

F-4-62
5) Remove pick-up roller [1].

[1]

F-4-63

4-28
 Chapter 4

4.3.10 Pick-up/Feed Unit

0020-5681

iPF820

a) Changing the pullout length of the lower roll unit

In servicing the printer, remove two screws [1] (both left and right) to increase the pullout length of the lower roll unit as needed.

[1]
[1]

F-4-64
b) Removing the pick-up unit
1) Open the upper cover.
2) Raise the ejection guides.
3) Pull out the lower roll unit as far as possible.
4) Remove screw [1] to remove left front inner cover [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-65

4-29
 Chapter 4

5) Remove eight screws [1] and connector [2] and remove slide pick-up unit [4] by sliding it to the left to release the groove from two pins [3].

[3] [3]
[1]

[2] [1] [4] [1]

F-4-66

The pick-up unit weighs about 27kg. Use maximum care not to drop it or let it hit other objects.

c) Precaution in removing the lower roll unit

In removing the lower roll unit from the printer body, hold the middle parts (front/rear) of the unit firmly.

F-4-67

Be careful in placing the lower roll unit on the floor temporarily not to get your fingers pinched between the floor and unit.

4-30
 Chapter 4

d) Removing the pick-up roller

1) Remove the pick-up unit.
2) Remove screw [1], guide [2], two E-rings [3], gear [4], parallel pin [5], two bushings [6] and connector [7] to release harness from the harness guide.
3) Remove four screws [8] to remove upper unit [9] of the pick-up unit.

[4] [5]
[6]
[3]
[6]

[7]
[2]

[9] [1]
[3] [8]

[8]

F-4-68
4) Remove E-ring [1] and slide three upper pick-up guides [2] to the left to release from five hooks [3] each, removing them from the leftmost one in sequence.

[3]

[3] [2]

[1]

F-4-69
5) Remove pick-up roller [1].

[1]

F-4-70

4-31
 Chapter 4

4.3.11 Purge Unit

0020-5671

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing the purge unit

1) Turn off the power to move the carriage onto the platen. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Opening the Cap and Moving
the Wiper Unit."
2) Remove two screws [1] and two connectors [2] to remove lift drive unit [3].

[3] [1]
[2]

F-4-71
3) Remove four screws [1] and waste ink tube joint [2] to remove purge unit [3].

[1] [3] [2]

[1]
F-4-72
b) Precaution in mounting the purge unit
In mounting the waste ink tube joint, insert it fully into position to make sure that it is not loose or the tube is not buckled.
Mount also the joint to fit into the hole in [A].

[A] [A]
F-4-73

4-32
 Chapter 4

4.3.12 Waste Ink Collection Unit

0020-5682

iPF810 / iPF820

In disassembling the waste ink collector, watch for ink leaks from the parts removed. When components are removed, put them in a PVC bag or the like to prevent
ink leaks from part [A] enclosed.
Expandable parts of the waste ink collector come bundled with PVC bags in which to package replaced parts in the service parts package.

[8]

[6]
[9]
[10]

[7]
[11]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]
[1]
F-4-74
T-4-1

Service Mode (Counter)

No Name Q'ty Part number Consumables
PARTS xx COUNTER x
[1] BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit 1 QM3-4814 Yes A1 A
[2] BP maintenance jet duct 1 QL2-2831 - -
[3] Platen ink BOX unit 3 QL2-2822 Yes A2/A3/A4 A
[4] Platen suction duct 1 QM3-4816 Yes A5 A
[5] Platen suction ink BOX unit 1 QM3-4828 Yes
[6] Head management sensor unit 2 QM3-4844 Yes K1 V
[7] HP maintenance jet tray unit 1 QM3-4912 Yes H2 H
[8] Ink tank unit waste ink tray 1 QM3-4911 - -
[9] Platen suction fan unit 1 QM3-4827 Yes A5 A
[10] Mist fan unit 1 QM3-4846 Yes V1 V
[11] Mist fan unit 1 QM3-4846 Yes

[1] BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit

[A]

F-4-75

4-33
 Chapter 4

[2] BP maintenace jet duct

[A]

F-4-76
[3] Platen ink BOX unit

[A]

F-4-77
[4] Platen suction duct

[A]

F-4-78
[5] Platen sunction ink BOX unit

[A]

[A]

F-4-79

4-34
 Chapter 4

[6] Head management sensor unit

[A]

F-4-80
[7] HP maintenace jet tray unit

[A]

F-4-81
[9] Platen suction fan unit

[A]

F-4-82
[10]/[11] Mist fan unit

[A]
F-4-83

4-35
 Chapter 4

a) Removing the HP maintenance jet tray unit

1) Move the carriage onto the platen.
2) Remove two screws [1] to remove HP maintenance jet tray unit [2].

[1] [2]

F-4-84
b) Removing the mist fan unit
1) Open the ink tank unit wide until it stops.
2) Remove three screws [1], connector [2] and two hooks [3] to remove, mist fan unit [4].

[3] [1] [3] [4]

[1] [2] [1]

F-4-85
c) Removing the platen suction fan unit
1) Open the ink tank unit wide until it stops.
2) Remove six screws [1], release the harnesses from harness guide [3] and remove exhaust cover [3] and support plate [4].

[2] [1] [2] [3]

[1] [4] [1]

F-4-86

4-36
 Chapter 4

3) Remove three screws [1] and connector [2] to remove platen suction fan unit [3].

[1] [1]

[3] [2]

F-4-87
d) Removing the platen suction duct
1) Removed the cover stay unit (R).
2) Remove two screws [1] to remove platen suction duct [2].

[1] [2]

F-4-88
e) Precaution in mounting the platen suction duct
Check that platen suction duct [1] is firmly seated in hole [2] in the rear side plate.

[1] [2]

F-4-89

4-37
 Chapter 4

f) Removing the platen ink BOX unit

1) Open the upper cover.
2) Raise the ejection guides.
3) Pull out the lower roll unit as far as possible.
4) Remove screw [1] to remove left front inner cover [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-90
5) Remove eight screws [1] and connector [2] and remove slide pick-up unit [4] by sliding it to the left to release the groove from two pins [3].

[3] [3]
[1]

[2] [1] [4] [1]

F-4-91

The pick-up unit weighs about 27kg. Use maximum care not to drop it or let it hit other objects.

6) Slide platen ink BOX unit [1] to the front out of position.

[1] [1] [1]

F-4-92

4-38
 Chapter 4

g) Removing the platen suction ink BOX unit

1) Remove the purge unit.
2) Remove the maintenance cartridge.
3) Remove the HP maintenance jet tray unit.
4) Remove the head management sensor.
5) Remove five screws [1] and two hooks [2] and then release harness from the harness guide to remove support plate [3].

[2] [1] [2]

[1] [3] [1]

F-4-93
6) Remove two screws [1] and connector [2], and remove maintenance cartridge base unit [3] and place it at another position temporarily.

[3] [2]

[1]
F-4-94

In placing the maintenance cartridge base unit elsewhere temporarily, be careful not to get the ink tubes scratched or dropped.

F-4-95

4-39
 Chapter 4

7) Remove two screws [2] to remove duct [2].

8) Remove screw [3] and hook [4] to remove platen suction ink BOX unit [5] from the front.

[4] [1] [2]

[3] [5]
F-4-96
h) Precaution in mounting the platen suction ink BOX unit
- Mount the maintenance cartridge base unit to ensure that two bosses [1] are inserted in hole [2] in the side plate.

[2]
[1]
F-4-97
- Clamp the ink tube so its mark [1] will come at the position of harness guide [2].

[1] [2]

F-4-98

4-40
 Chapter 4

i) Removing the BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit

1) Remove three screw [1] to remove support plate [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-99
2) Remove screw [1] to remove duct [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-100
3) Remove two screws [1] and connector [2] to remove BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit [3].

[2]
[3]

[1]
F-4-101

4-41
 Chapter 4

j) Precaution in mounting the BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit

- Check that bosses [1] on the BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit are inserted in hole [2] in the side plate.

[1]

[2]
F-4-102
- Check that boss [1] on the duct is inserted in the groove in the BP maintenance jet ink BOX unit.

[2] [1]

F-4-103

4-42
 Chapter 4

4.3.13 Ink Tank Unit

0020-5673

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing ink tank unit

1) Perform ink drainage. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Ink Drainage."
2) Remove the joint [1] interconnecting the ink tube unit and the ink tank unit to each other.
3) Remove four screws [2] to remove two ground plates [3].
4) Remove five connectors [4] to release the bundled wires and ink tube from the guide.

[1] [4]

[2]

[3]

[2]
F-4-104

Cover the joint in the ink tube, as with a PVC bag, to keep inks from splashing from them.

5) Remove two screws [1] and loosen four screws [2] to slide support [3]. Remove two screws [4] to remove ink tank unit [5].

[3] [3]
[5]
[2]

[2]

[1] [4] [1]

F-4-105

4-43
 Chapter 4

b) Precaution in mounting the ink tank unit

Check that two hooks [1] on the ink tank unit are inserted into notches [2] in the ink tank unit waste ink tray.

[1]

[2]
F-4-106
c) Removing the valve motor unit
1) To remove the valve motor unit, remove the ink tank cover unit.
2) Remove three screws [1], two connectors [2] and bearing [3], and then remove valve motor unit [4].

[2]

[1]

[1]

[4]

[3]
F-4-107

4-44
 Chapter 4

4.3.14 Multi Sensor

0020-5680

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing the multi sensor

1) Turn off the power to move the carriage onto the platen. "See Disassembly/Reassembly > Disassembly/Reassembly Precautions > Opening the Cap and Moving
the Wiper Unit."
2) Remove the printhead.
3) With slant adjustment lever [1] being set at the bottom position, remove three screws [2] and connector [3] to remove carriage left cover [4].

[3]

[4]

[2]

[2] [1]
F-4-108
4) Remove four screws [1] and remove carriage left inner cover [2] by moving it to the front, together with the spring and lever.

[2] [1]

[1]
F-4-109

4-45
 Chapter 4

5) Remove screw [1] and connector [2] to remove multi sensor [3].

[1] [3] [2]

F-4-110
b) Precaution in mounting the multi sensor
To attach the carriage left inner cover, mount the multi sensor to allow leaf spring [1] in the carriage into notch [2] in the lever with the slant adjustment lever being
set at the bottom position.

[1]

[2]
F-4-111
c) Removing the multi sensor reference plate
1) Remove screw [1] to remove the multi sensor reference plate [2].

[1] [2]

F-4-112
d) Note on replacing the multi sensor
When the multi sensor has been replaced, be sure to replace the multi sensor reference plate(QL2-2840-000:MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE) as well.

f) Action to take after replacing the multi sensor

Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in each printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical
axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and sensor calibration adjusted prior to shipment. When the multi sensor has been replaced, they should require
adjustment.

Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:

1) Optical axis correction

- Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS

4-46
 Chapter 4

Media type: Gloss photo paper

2) Paper gap adjustment

- Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.

4-47
 Chapter 4

4.3.15 Linear Encoder Sensor

0020-5676

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing the linear encoder sensor

1) Remove the carriage unit.
2) Remove screw [1] and connector [2] and remove linear encoder sensor [4] by moving it slantwise upward to release from two bosses [3].

[2] [1]

[4]

[3]
F-4-113
b) Removing the linear scale
1) Open the ink tank unit wide until it stops.
2) Remove the spring [1] and the hook [2] to remove the linear scale [3].

[2]

[1]
[3]

F-4-114
c) Precaution in mounting the linear encoder sensor/linear scale
Check that linear scale [1] is seated within linear encoder sensor [2].

[2] [1]

F-4-115

4-48
 Chapter 4

4.3.16 Head Management Sensor

0020-5674

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Removing the head management sensor

1) Remove the HP maintenance jet tray unit.
2) Remove the screw [1] and connector [2] to remove head management sensor [3].

[1] [3] [2]

F-4-116
b) Action to take after replacing the head management sensor
Because the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical axis corrected to adjust
the non-discharging nozzle detection position prior to shipment. When the head management sensor carriage unit has been replaced, it should require adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions:
SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.

4-49
 Chapter 4

4.3.17 PCBs
0014-8989

iPF810 / iPF820

Do not replace the main controller PCB and the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board) at the same time.
Both PCBs hold vital information, such as settings and a carriage drive time. Before either PCB is replaced, such information is temporarily saved through internal
communication with the other PCB and is automatically written to the new PCB when it is installed. For this reason, the two PCBs cannot be replaced at the same
time. To replace both PCBs, work in order of (a) > (b).
When the main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge relay PCB have been replaced with service parts, check that the latest version of firmware is installed in
them.
If not, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

a) Replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board)

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.

2) Replace the maintenance cartridge relay PCB.
3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Paper Source] and [Information] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)
4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)
5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
6) Select MC BOARD and press the [OK] key.
7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.
8) Turn on the power.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

b) Replacing the main controller PCB

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.

2) Replace the main controller PCB.
3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Paper Source] and [Information] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)
4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)
5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
6) Select CPU BOARD and press the [OK] key.
7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.
8) Turn on the power.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.

4-50
 Chapter 4

4.3.18 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit

0020-5706

iPF810 / iPF820

This section explains how to move the cap, carriage lock pin and wiper unit manually.
Moving carriage when the power of the printer is off, releasing carriage lock pin and uncapping must be done manually.
1. Uncapping, releasing the carriage lock pin
1) Open the upper cover and remove the right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side covers, rear right cover and upper right cover.
2) Turn the gear [1] or motor pulley [2] of the purge unit toward the direction of the arrow. This will lower cap and lock pin, allowing the carriage [3] to be moved.

[3]

[2] [1]
F-4-117
2. Moving the wiper unit
1) Open the upper cover and remove the right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side covers, rear right cover and upper right cover.
2) To move the cap [3], lock pin [4] and wiper unit [5], turn the gear [1] or motor pulley [2] of the purge unit toward the direction of the arrow.

[3] [4] [5]

[2] [1]

F-4-118

4-51
 Chapter 4

4.3.19 Opening and closing ink supply valves

0020-5708

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Opening and closing ink supply valves

1) Remove the ink tank cover unit.

2) Press valve lever [1] with a finger to open the ink supply valve.

[1]

F-4-119

- If the printhead fixer lever is released with the ink supply valve to an ink tube open while the tube is filled with an ink, the ink in the tube could flow backward to
the ink tank unit, leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank.
- If an ink supply valve remains open, as on occurrence of an ink supply valve open/close error, remove the valve motor unit and (see Disassembly/Reassembly >
Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink Tank Units) and close the ink supply valve.

4-52
 Chapter 4

4.3.20 Draining the ink

0020-5710

iPF810 / iPF820

There are two ways to drain the ink passage of inks: automatic and manual.

Be sure to drain the ink from the ink passage to prevent ink leakage before disassembling any component of the ink passage or reshipping the printer.

1. Automatic Ink Drain

Execute Automatic Ink Drain by selecting Maintenance > Move Printer from the main menu.

Execute Automatic Ink Drain once again if the printer shuts down due to a power failure or any other trouble before the operation completes.

2. Manual Ink Drain

Drain the ink passage of inks manually if any electrical component in the printer fails or firmware malfunctions or if the printer fails to be powered on.
1) Remove right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side covers, ink tank cover units. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/
Reassembly > External Covers.
2) Remove the ink tanks.
3) Move the carriage to above the platen. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit.
4) Release the printhead fixer lever.
5) Open the ink supply valves to allow the inks to flow into the subtanks.

4-53
 Chapter 4

4.4 Applying the Grease

4.4.1 Applying the Grease

0020-5711

iPF810 / iPF820

Apply the grease at the location shown below.

Smear the grease lightly and evenly with a flat brush.

Don't apply the grease to locations other than those designated. Unwanted grease may cause poor print quality, take particular care that grease does not get onto the
wiper, cap, or the linear scale.

T-4-2

No. Place Kind Quantity Note

1 The joint base rib of carriage unit Molykote PG-641 Smear the grease
lightly
2 Feed roller backup x 2 parts Permalub G No.2 approx.12mg Don't apply to central backup with
bearing.
Bushing Permalub G No.2 Smear the grease
lightly
Feed roller bearing Permalub G No.2 approx.24mg Apply if remove bearing from a feed
roller.
3 Pinch roller release bushing x 5 parts Permalub G No.2 Smear the grease
lightly
Pinch roller pressure release gear Permalub G No.2 Smear the grease
lightly
The concave of the pinch roller arm x 28 Permalub G No.2 Smear the grease
parts lightly
4 Upper cover stay shaft hole Permalub G No.2 approx.24mg
The gear shaft of the upper cover stay gear Permalub G No.2 approx.24mg
Upper cover stay shaft end Permalub G No.2 approx.24mg
The gear tooth face of upper cover stay Permalub G No.2 Smear the grease
lightly

1. The joint base rib of carriage unit [1]

[1]

[2]
F-4-120

4-54
 Chapter 4

2. Feed roller backup [1](2 parts)/Bushing [2]/Feed roller bearing [3]

[3]

[1]

[2]

F-4-121
3. Pinch roller release bushing [1](5 parts)/Pinch roller pressure release gear [2]/The concave of the pinch roller arm [3](28 parts)

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-4-122

4-55
 Chapter 4

4. Upper cover stay shaft hole [1]/The gear shaft of the upper cover stay gear [2]/Upper cover stay shaft end [3]/The gear tooth face of upper cover stay [4]

[1]

[2] [3]
[4]
F-4-123

4-56
 Chapter 4

4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items

4.5.1 Adjustment Item List

0017-8323

iPF810 / iPF820

The following adjustment procedures need to be performed when parts have been replaced or remove and then reinstalled:

T-4-3

Adjustment item Adjustment timing

Multi sensor recalibration Multi sensor replacement/removal
Carriage unit replacement/removal
Adjusting feed roller eccentricity Feed roller
Feed roller encoder
Head management sensor recalibration Head management sensor replacement/removal
Carriage unit replacement/removal

4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor

0020-5714

iPF810 / iPF820

a) Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor

The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-2840-000:MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi
sensor is being replaced.
b) Multi Sensor Recalibration
Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in each printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical
axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and calibration adjusted prior to shipment. When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced, they
should require adjustment.

Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:

1) Optical axis correction

- Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS
Media type: Gloss photo paper

2) Paper gap adjustment

- Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.

4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder
0012-6594

iPF810 / iPF820
Feed roller eccentricity is factory-adjusted (correction of variation in the paper feed amount per rotation). It is necessary to adjust feed roller eccentricity after re-
placing the feed roller encoder or feed roller.
In the service mode, perform automatic adjustment of feed roller eccentricity.

Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING
Media type : Photo glossy paper

If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual ad-
justment.

Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2
Media type: Gloss photo paper
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.

4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor

0013-7146

iPF810 / iPF820

Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging
detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance be-
tween the head management sensor and the carriage unit, readjustment is required
Perform the readjustment in the service mode.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.

4-57
 Chapter 4

4-58
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
 Contents

Contents

5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ...........................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Consumable Parts...........................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
 Chapter 5

5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

0012-6595

iPF810 / iPF820

T-5-1

Level Periodic Replacement part

User None
Service None
Personnel

5.2 Consumable Parts

5.2.1 Consumable Parts

0020-5716

iPF810 / iPF820

T-5-2

Consumables Service Mode

Life
Name Part number Q'ty PARTS xx COUNTER x States (Error Code)
sheets/A0
Service WASTE INK BOX UNIT (L) QM3-4814-000 1 25000 A1 A OK/W1/E146-4001
WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT QL2-2822-000 3 25000 A2/A3/A4
PLATEN FAN DUCT UNIT QM3-4816-000 1 25000 A5
PLATEN SUCTION FAN UNIT QM3-4827-000 1
WASTE INK BOX UNIT QM3-4828-000 1
CARRIAGE UNIT QM3-4835-000 1 25000 D1/D2/D3 D OK/W1/W2
MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR QL2-2840-000 1 25000 D1/D2/D3/D5
REFERENCE
SCALE, LINEAR QC2-9618-000 1 25000 D2
TUBE UNIT QM3-4834-000 1 25000 D4 OK/W1/E144-4047
MULTI SENSOR UNIT QM3-5240-000 1 25000 D5 OK/W1/W2
PURGE UNIT QM3-4847-000 1 25000 H1/H2 H OK/W1/E141-4046
WASTE INK RECEPTACLE QM3-4912-000 1 25000 H2 OK/W1/E144-404F
UNIT
HEAD MANAGEMENT QM3-4844-000 1 25000 K1 K OK/W1/E194-404A
SENSOR UNIT
MOTOR, DC BRUSHLESS QK1-5211-000 1 25000 M1 M OK/W1/W2
FEED MOTOR ASS'Y QM2-2502-000 1 25000 P1 P OK/W1/W2
ROLLER, PICK-UP QC2-9712-000 1 25000 S1 S OK/W1/W2
MIST FAN UNIT QM3-4846-000 2 25000 V1 V OK/W1/E146-4001
CUTTER QM3-4873-000 1 25000 Y1 Y OK/W1/W2
User See "Product Overview> Features> Consumables"

After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.

5-1
 Chapter 5

5.3 Periodic Maintenance

5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance

0020-5718

iPF810 / iPF820

T-5-3

Level Periodic maintenance

User Cleaning of ink mist and other substances(about once each month
Service personnel None

a) Printer cleaning
To keep up with print quality and prevent troubles, clean the printer about once each month.

1) Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot [1], power cord plug, and so on. Dry these
parts with a dry cloth.

[1]
F-5-1
2) Open the Top Cover.

[1]

F-5-2
3) If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes [1] on the Platen, the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves [2], use the included Cleaning Brush [3] to wipe it away.

[3]

[2] [1]
F-5-3

5-2
 Chapter 5

MEMO:
If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.

4) Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it. Wipe away any ink residue on the Top Cover Roller [1], all over
the Platen [2], the Pinch Roller Unit [3], the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves [4], the Ejection Guide [5], the switch [6], the Borderless Printing Ink Groove of the
right side [7], and so on.

[7]

[1]

[5]

[2] [4] [6] [3]

F-5-4

- Do not dry the interiors of the top cover with a dry cloth. Electrostatic charges could make the internal components susceptible to dirt, resulting in degraded print
quality.
- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result
in fires or electrical shock hazards.
- Do not touch the transparent sheet adjacent to the upper cover roller. Damages could result.
- Further, do not touch linear scale [1], carriage shaft [2] and ink tube unit [3]. Do not clean multi sensor reference plate/BP maintenance jet duct [4] and HP main-
tenance jet tray unit [5]. Printer failures could result.

[1] [3]

[2]

[4] [5]
F-5-5

5-3
 Chapter 5

5) Close upper cover [1].

[1]

F-5-6

5-4
Chapter 5

5-5
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
 Contents

Contents

6.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement...............................................................................................................6-1
6.2.1 Main controller PCB .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.3 Head relay PCB.......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3 Version Up ...................................................................................................................................................................6-20
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.4 Service Tools................................................................................................................................................................6-21
6.4.1 Tool List..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-21
 Chapter 6

6.1 Troubleshooting

6.1.1 Outline

6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting

0013-1940

iPF810 / iPF820

1. Outline
Troubles subject to troubleshooting are classified into those shown on the display (warning, error, and service call) and those not shown on the display.
The code of warning and error is shown by combining alphanumeric characters of eight digits and four digits.
The code of service call error is shown by the initial character of "E" and combining alphanumeric characters of three digits and four digits.
No code number is displayed when a warning occurs. Selecting [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] allows you to check the warning log.

2. Precautions for Troubleshooting

1) Check the environmental conditions and the media used for printing.
2) Before performing troubleshooting, make sure that all connectors and cables are connected properly.
3) When servicing the printer with the external cover removed and the AC power supplied, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical
devices.
4) In the following sections, the troubleshooting steps are described such that the component related to the most probable cause of the problem will be repaired
or replaced first, being followed by components with less problem probability. If multiple components have the same problem probability, the steps are described
begging with the easiest one.
After performing each step, check to see if the problem has been resolved by making test prints. If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
5) After completion of the troubleshooting, check that all connectors and cables have been reconnected and screws have been tightened firmly.
6) Whenever you have performed replacement or repair services, make test prints to check whether the problem has been resolved.

6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement

6.2.1 Main controller PCB

0020-5726

iPF810 / iPF820

1
J3201 J3003
1
1 1
J3501 J3601
J1801
1 1
J3502 J3602 1

J3150 J2801
1
1
A1

J3401
1 J2501

B1
J1101
J1102
J2601

J1001
1 J3001 J2402
1
1 1 1 1 1 A1 1
J1202 J1201 J3301 J3002 J2502 J2702 J2701
1 B1
F-6-1
T-6-1

J1101/J1102
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 GND - GND
4 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
5 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
6 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
7 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
8 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
9 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
10 N.C. - N.C.
11 GND - GND
12 /PME IN Power management enable signal
13 /INTA IN Interrupt signal
14 GND - GND
15 /RST OUT PCI Reset signal
16 CLK OUT PCI Clock signal
17 /GNT OUT Ground signal

6-1
 Chapter 6

J1101/J1102
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
18 GND - GND
19 /REQ IN Request signal
20 AD31 IN/OUT Address and data signal
21 AD30 IN/OUT Address and data signal
22 AD29 IN/OUT Address and data signal
23 AD28 IN/OUT Address and data signal
24 GND - GND
25 AD27 IN/OUT Address and data signal
26 AD26 IN/OUT Address and data signal
27 AD25 IN/OUT Address and data signal
28 AD24 IN/OUT Address and data signal
29 /CBE3 IN/OUT Bus command and byte enable signal
30 IDSEL OUT Inisharaization device select signal
31 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
33 AD23 IN/OUT Address and data signal
34 AD22 IN/OUT Address and data signal
35 AD21 IN/OUT Address and data signal
36 AD20 IN/OUT Address and data signal
37 GND - GND
38 AD19 IN/OUT Address and data signal
39 AD18 IN/OUT Address and data signal
40 AD17 IN/OUT Address and data signal
41 AD16 IN/OUT Address and data signal
42 /CBE2 OUT Bus command and byte enable signal
43 GND - GND
44 /FRAME IN/OUT Cycle frame signal
45 /IRDY IN/OUT Initiator ready signal
46 /TRDY IN/OUT Target ready signal
47 /DEVSEL IN/OUT Device select signal
48 GND - GND
49 /STOP IN/OUT Stop signal
50 /LOCK IN/OUT Lock signal
51 /PERP IN/OUT Parity error signal
52 /SERR IN/OUT System error signal
53 PAR IN/OUT Parity signal
54 /CBE1 IN/OUT Bus command and byte enable signal
55 GND - GND
56 GND - GND
57 AD15 IN/OUT Address and data signal
58 AD14 IN/OUT Address and data signal
59 AD13 IN/OUT Address and data signal
60 AD12 IN/OUT Address and data signal
61 GND - GND
62 AD11 IN/OUT Address and data signal
63 AD10 IN/OUT Address and data signal
64 AD9 IN/OUT Address and data signal
65 AD8 IN/OUT Address and data signal
66 /CBE0 IN/OUT Bus command and byte enable signal
67 GND - GND
68 AD7 IN/OUT Address and data signal
69 AD6 IN/OUT Address and data signal
70 AD5 IN/OUT Address and data signal
71 AD4 IN/OUT Address and data signal
72 GND - GND
73 AD3 IN/OUT Address and data signal
74 AD2 IN/OUT Address and data signal
75 AD1 IN/OUT Address and data signal
76 AD0 IN/OUT Address and data signal
77 GND - GND
78 HDD_LED - N.C.
79 +5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
80 +5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
81 +5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
82 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)

6-2
 Chapter 6

J1101/J1102
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
83 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
84 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
85 GND - GND
86 GND - GND
87 GND - GND
88 GND - GND

T-6-2

J1201
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 AGND2 - GND
2 TXP OUT Transmission Data
3 TXN OUT Transmission Data
4 AGND2 - GND
5 RXN IN Receive Data
6 RXP IN Receive Data
7 AGND2 - GND

T-6-3

J1202
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 HDD_LED IN Access signal
2 +5V IN Power supply(+5V)
3 GND - GND

T-6-4

J1801
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 AFCONT OUT Normal/Power saving switch signal
2 VM_ENB OUT VM enable signal
3 VMGND - GND
4 VMGND - GND
5 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
6 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
7 GND - GND
8 GND - GND
9 GND - GND
10 RGV20(+5V) IN Power supply(+5V)
11 RGV20(+5V) IN Power supply(+5V)
12 RGV20(+5V) IN Power supply(+5V)

T-6-5

J2402
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 VM_26V OUT Power supply(+26V)
2 MISTFAN_L_ALARM OUT Mist fan(L) alarm signal
3 MISTFAN_L_PWM OUT Mist fan(L) duty control signal
4 GND - GND

T-6-6

J2501
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 PUMPM1_AM OUT Purge motor drive signal AM
2 PUMPM1_AP OUT Purge motor drive signal AP
3 GND - GND
4 PUMPR_ENCA IN Pump encoder output signal A
5 RGV31(SNS5V_FU) OUT Power supply(+5V)
6 PUMPR_ENCB IN Pump encoder output signal B
7 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
8 GND - GND
9 /CONTROL_CAM_R IN Pump cam sensor output signal
10 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
11 GND - GND

6-3
 Chapter 6

J2501
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
12 /LIFT_CAM IN Lift cam sensor output signal
13 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
14 GND - GND
15 /CR_HP IN Carriage HP sensor output signal
16 OUT_LIFTM_VM OUT Power supply
17 OUT_LIFTM0_A OUT Lift motor drive signal A
18 OUT_LIFTM2_AX_N0 OUT Lift motor drive signal AX
19 OUT_LIFTM1_B OUT Lift motor drive signal B
20 OUT_LIFTM3_BX_N1 OUT Lift motor drive signal BX

T-6-7

J2601
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 POWER_ON IN Power switch signal
2 GND - GND
3 RGV20(+5V) OUT Power supply(+5V)
4 BUZZER OUT Buzzer control signal
5 PDO OUT Panel IC control signal
6 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
7 PDI OUT Panel IC data signal
8 HDD_LED OUT HDD lamp control signal
9 /PRESET OUT Panel reset signal
10 GND - GND
11 PCK OUT Panel IC clock signal
12 PANEL_5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
13 /PCS OUT Panel IC chip select signal

T-6-8

J2403
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 GND - GND
2 /MEDIA_R IN Media sensor output signal
3 RGV10(MEDIA5V) OUT Power supply(+5V)
4 /ATUKAIJO_IN IN Pinch roller pressure release swiych output signal
5 GND - GND
6 MENT_SDA IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal (data)
7 MENT_SCL IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal (clock)
8 GND - GND
9 RGV28(UMF3V) OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
10 RVG17(VM_26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
11 KYUINFAN_ALARM_IN IN Suction fan alarm signal
12 KYUINFAN_PWM_ON OUT Suction fan duty control signal
13 GND - GND
14 RGV17(VM_26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
15 MISTFAN_R_ALARM IN Mist fan(R) alarm signal
16 MISTFAN_PWM OUT Mist fan duty control signal
17 GND - GND

T-6-9

J3003
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 /MAKITORI_UNIT IN Media take-up paper detection sensor
2 /MAKITORI_LOCK_SENS IN Media take-up on/off sensor output signal
3 /MAKITORI_VCC_ON OUT Power supply ON signal
4 MAKITORI_VM_ON OUT Power supply(+26V)
5 /MAKITORI_ENB OUT Media take-up drive enable signal
6 PHOTO_SENS_OUT IN Media take-up paper detection sensor output signal
7 RGV17(VM_26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
8 RGV17(VM_26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
9 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
11 RGV29(UMF5V) OUT Power supply(+5V)

6-4
 Chapter 6

T-6-10

J2401
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 INKBENM1_AM OUT Valve motor drive signal AM
2 INKBENM1_AP OUT Valve motor drive signal AP
3 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3V)
4 GND - GND
5 /INKBEN_OPEN_R IN Valve open/close detection sensor output signal
6 /TANK_COVER_R IN Ink tank cover switch output signal
7 GND - GND
8 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3V)
9 GND - GND
10 /INKBEN_CAM_R IN Agitation cam sensor output signal

T-6-11

J3201
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal
2 GND - GND
3 OUT_TANK_DAT8 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 8
4 TANK_+3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
5 OUT_TANK_DAT7 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 7
6 OUT_TANK_DAT6 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 6
7 GND - GND
8 OUT_INK_DETECT6 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 6
9 OUT_INK_DETECT7 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 7
10 OUT_INK_DETECT8 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 8
11 OUT_TANK_DAT11 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 11
12 OUT_TANK_DAT10 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 10
13 OUT_TANK_DAT9 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 9
14 OUT_INK_DETECT9 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 9
15 OUT_INK_DETECT10 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 10
16 OUT_INK_DETECT11 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 11

T-6-12

J4002
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 GND - GND
2 YOBITOM_ENC_1A IN HP maintenance jet pump encoder output signal A
3 RGV7(SNS5V2) OUT Power supply(+5V)
4 YOBITOM_ENC_1B IN HP maintenance jet pump encoder output signal B
5 YOBITOKYUUINMM_AM OUT HP maintenance jet purge motor drive signal AM
6 N.C - N.C
7 N.C - N.C
8 YOBITOKYUUINMM_AP HP maintenance jet purge motor drive signal AP

T-6-13

J3152
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 RGV16(VM32V) OUT Power supply(+32V)
2 RGV16(VM32V) IN Upper cover lock switch output signal

T-6-14

J2702
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 RGN17(VM_26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
2 DCOVER_R OUT Upper cover lock solenoid(R) drive signal
3 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
4 GND - GND
5 /CUTTERM_SNS_R IN Cutter HP sensor output signal
6 GND - GND
7 /FUTO_CLMP OUT Head management sensor clamp signal
8 /FUTO_ON OUT Head management sensor ON signal
9 RGV31(SNS5V_FU) OUT Power supply(+5V)

6-5
 Chapter 6

J2702
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
10 /FUTO_CMP IN Head management sensor ink detection signal
11 N.C - N.C
12 N.C - N.C
13 N.C - N.C
14 N.C - N.C

T-6-15

J3002
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 TH2_OUT IN Thermister output signal
2 GND - GND
3 RH2_OUT IN Temperature/humidity sensor output signal
4 RGV29(UMF5V) OUT Power supply(+5v)

T-6-16

J3801
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3V)
2 GND - GND
3 /PICKUP_ATUKAIJO_SNS_1 IN Roll media pick-up cam sensor output signal
4 RGV7(SNS5V2) OUT Power supply(+5V)
5 /KYUUSHI_SNS_F IN Roll media detection sensor output signal
6 GND - GND
7 RGV7(SNS5V2) OUT Power supply(+5V)
8 /KYUUSHI_SNS_R1 Roll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor output signal
9 GND - GND
10 RGV7(SNS5V2) OUT Power supply(+5V)
11 /YOUSHIHABA_SNS Roll media width detection sensor output signal
12 GND - GND

T-6-17

J4003
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 OUT_ZENMENM_B OUT Roll media pick-up motor drive signal B
2 OUT_ZENMENM_A OUT Roll media pick-up motor drive signal A
3 OUT_ZENMENM_BB OUT Roll media pick-up motor drive signal BB
4 OUT_ZENMENM_AB OUT Roll media pick-up motor drive signal AB

T-6-18

J3901
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 RGN19(VM_26V_2) OUT Power supply(+26V)
2 PICKUP_CL_OUT OUT Roll media pick-up cam clutch drive signal
3 RGN19(VM_26V_2) OUT Power supply(+26V)
4 KYUUSHI_CL_OUT OUT Roll media pick-up roller clutch drive signal
5 RGN19(VM_26V_2) OUT Power supply(+26V)
6 FLAPPER_SOL_OUT OUT Flapper solenoid drive signal
7 RGN19(VM_26V_2) OUT Power supply(+26V)
8 PINCH_CL_OUT OUT Pinch roller pressure clutch drive signal
9 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3V)
10 GND - GND
11 /PINCH_CLOSE_SNS IN Pinch roller pressure detection sensor output signal
12 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3V)
13 GND - GND
14 /PINCH_OPEN_SNS IN Pinch roller release detection sensor output signal
15 N.C - N.C

T-6-19

J3902
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 OUT_LENIP_BB OUT Pinch roller pressure motor drive signal BB
2 OUT_LENIP_B OUT Roll media pick-up motor drive signal B
3 OUT_LENIP_AB OUT Roll media pick-up motor drive signal AB

6-6
 Chapter 6

J3902
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
4 OUT_LENIP_A OUT Roll media pick-up motor drive signal A

T-6-20

J3151
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 RGV16(VM32V) OUT Power supply(+32V)
2 RGV16(VM32V) IN Upper cover lock switch output signal
3 N.C - N.C

T-6-21

J4001
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
A1 GND - GND
A2 LF_FNCA IN Feed roller encoder output signal A
A3 RGV29(UMF5V) OUT Power supply(+5V)
A4 LF_FNCB IN Feed roller encoder output signal B
A5 SNS3V(RGV18) OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
A6 GND - GND
A7 /LF_HP IN Feed roller HP sensor output signal
A8 GND - GND
A9 SPOOL_ENCA - N.C
A10 RGV29(UMF5V) - N.C
A11 SPOOL_ENCB - N.C
A12 N.C - N.C
A13 N.C - N.C
A14 N.C - N.C
B1 RGV19(VM_26V_2) OUT Power supply(+26V)
B2 YOBITOKYUUIN_FAN_ALA BP maintenance jet suction fan alarm signal
RM_2
B3 GND - GND
B4 RGV8(SNS3V) OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
B5 GND - GND
B6 /CUTTERM_SNS_L IN Cutter left position sensor output signal
B7 CUTTERM_AM OUT Cutter motor drive signal AM
B8 CUTTERM_AP OUT Cutter motor drive signal AP
B9 RGV17(VM26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
B10 DCOVER_L OUT Upper cover lock solenoid (L) drive signal
B11 RGV17(VM26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
B12 SPOOL_CL_1OUT OUT Roll media rewinding clutch drive signal
B13 RGV17(VM26V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
B14 SPOOL_CL_2_OUT OUT Roll media pick-up roller clutch drive signal

T-6-22

J3150
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 IN 3- IN Hole sensor input signal 3-
2 IN 3+ IN Hole sensor input signal 3+
3 IN 1+ IN Hole sensor input signal 1+
4 IN 2- IN Hole sensor input signal 2-
5 IN 1- IN Hole sensor input signal 1-
6 IN 2+ IN Hole sensor input signal 2+
7 VM_GND - GND
8 +5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
9 OUT B OUT Motor output signal B
10 OUT B OUT Motor output signal B
11 OUT A OUT Motor output signal A
12 OUT A OUT Motor output signal A
13 OUT C OUT Motor output signal C
14 OUT C OUT Motor output signal C

6-7
 Chapter 6

T-6-23

J2801
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 OUT_LFSP_A OUT Feed motor drive signal A
2 OUT_LFSP_VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
3 OUT_LFSP_AB OUT Feed motor drive signal AB
4 OUT_LFSP_BB OUT Feed motor drive signal BB
5 OUT_LFSP_VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
6 OUT_LFSP_B OUT Feed motor drive signal B

T-6-24

J4101
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
A1 /OP_DACCHAKU_R_IN IN Lower roll unit release detection switch (R) output signal
A2 /OP_DACCHAKU_L_IN IN Lower roll unit release detection switch (L) output signal
A3 OP_KYUUSHI_UNIT - GND
A4 OP_FLAPPER_SOL OUT Lower flapper solenoid drive signal
A5 OP_PICKUP_CL OUT Lower roll media pick-up cam clutch drive signal
A6 OP_KYUUSHI_CL OUT Lower roll media pick-up roller clutch drive signal
A7 GND - GND
A8 GND - GND
A9 RGV19(VM_26V_2) OUT Power supply(+26V)
A10 RGV19(VM_26V_2) OUT Power supply(+26V)
A11 GND - GND
A12 RGV29(UMF5V) OUT Power supply(+26V)
A13 OP_SPOOL_ENCA_IN - N.C
A14 OP_KYUUSHI_VM_ON_OU OUT Power supply(+26V)
T
A15 OP_KYUUSHI_VM_ENB_IN - GND
A16 KADANM_ENCA_IN - GND
B1 KADANM_ENCB_IN - GND
B2 OP_KYUUSHI_3V_ON OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
B3 OP_KYUUSHI_5V_ON OUT Power supply(+5V)
B4 GND - GND
B5 RGV28(UMF3V) OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
B6 OP_SPOOL_ENCB_IN - N.C
B7 OP_SPOOL_CL_2_OUT OUT Lower roll media pick-up pressure clutch
B8 OP_SPOOL_CL_1_OUT OUT Lower roll media rewiding clutch drive signal
B9 /TMDV_SLEEP6 OUT Lower roll media pick-up motor control signal
B10 KADANM_CLK_PHS OUT Lower roll media pick-up motor control signal
B11 KADANM_DATA OUT Lower roll media pick-up motor control signal
B12 KADANM_STB_ENB OUT Lower roll media pick-up motor control signal
B13 / IN Lower roll media pick-up cam sensor output signal
OP_PICHUP_ATSUKAI_SNS
_1
B14 /OP_YOUSHIHABA_SNS IN Lower roll media width detection sensor output signal
B15 /OP_KYUUSHI_SNS_R1 IN Lower roll media pick-up roller paper detection sensor output signal
B16 /OP_KYUUSHI_SNS_F IN Lower roll media detection sensor output signal

T-6-25

J3601
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 ENCODER_A IN Linear encoder output signal A
2 ENCODER_B IN Linear encoder output signal B
3 /LIFT CAM IN - GND
4 /CR_COVER IN Printhead fixer lever sensor output signal
5 /OUT_ENB OUT Head data enable signal
6 H-DASH_LICC2_B OUT Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
7 GND - GND
8 H1-D-DATA-7-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 7(D)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-E-HE-8_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 8(E)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-E-DATA-8-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 8(E)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-F-DATA-10-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 10(F)

6-8
 Chapter 6

J3601
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
15 GND - GND
16 H1-E-DATA-9-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 9(E)
17 GND - GND
18 H1-F-HE-10_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 10(F)
19 GND - GND
20 H1-F-DATA-11-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 11(F)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-F-HE-11_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 11(F)
23 GND - GND
24 H1-F-DATA-11-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 11(F)
25 GND - GND
26 H1-F-DATA-10-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 10(F)
27 GND - GND
28 H1-E-HE-9_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 9(E)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-E-DATA-9-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 9(E)
31 GND - GND
32 VH_DIS OUT VH selection signal
33 H1-DASLK_LICC2 OUT Head(R) analogue switch clock signal
34 H1-DLD_LICC2 OUT Head(R) analogue switch latch signal
35 H1-DATA_LICC2 OUT Head(R) analogue switch data signal
36 PWLED2_ON OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal
37 PWLED1_ON OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal
38 PWLED3_ON OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal
39 H3V_ON OUT Power supply
40 MLT_SENS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1
41 MLT_SENS_2IN IN Multi sensor signal 2
42 PWLED4_ON OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal
43 GND - GND
44 H1-B-DATA-2-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 2(B)
45 GND - GND
46 H1-B-DATA-3-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 1(B)
47 GND - GND
48 H1-C-HE-4_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 4(C)
49 GND - GND
50 H1-C-DATA-4-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 4(C)

T-6-26

J3602
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 IO_ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM controll signal(data)
2 IO_ASIC_SCL IN/OUT Head ROM controll signal(clock)
3 GND - GND
4 H1-E-DATA-8-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
5 OUT ENB OUT Head data enable signal
6 H1-D-HE-7_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
7 GND - GND
8 H1-D-DATA-7-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 7(D)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-D-DATA-6-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 6(D)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-D-DATA-6-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 6(D)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-D-HE-6_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 6(D)
15 GND - GND
16 H1-C-HE-5_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
17 GND - GND
18 H1-C-DATA-5-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
19 GND - GND
20 H1-DSOUT2 OUT Head temperature output signal 2
21 H1-DSOUT1 OUT Head temperature output signal 1
22 GND - GND
23 GND - GND
24 H1_CLK_B OUT Head(L) clock signal
25 GND - GND

6-9
 Chapter 6

J3602
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
26 H1_LT_B OUT Head(L) latch signal
27 GND - GND
28 H1-C-DATA-5-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 5(C)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-B-HE-3_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
31 GND - GND
32 H1-C-DATA-4-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 4(C)
33 GND - GND
34 H1-B-DATA-3-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 3(B)
35 GND - GND
36 H1-B-DATA-2-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 2(B)
37 GND - GND
38 H1-A-DATA-1-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 1(A)
39 GND - GND
40 H1-A-HE-1_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 1(A)
41 GND - GND
42 H1-A-DATA-0-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 0(A)
43 GND - GND
44 H1-A-HE-0_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 0(A)
45 GND - GND
46 H1-A-DATA-0-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
47 GND - GND
48 H1-A-DATA-1-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
49 GND - GND
50 H1-B-HE-2_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)

T-6-27

J3401
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 VMGND - GND
2 VMGND - GND
3 VMGND - GND
4 VMGND - GND
5 VH_MONI1 IN VH controll signal 1
6 VH_ENB OUT VH power supply ON/OFF signal
7 VH_MONI2 IN VH controll signal 2
8 GND - GND
9 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
10 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
11 GND - GND
12 SNS5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
13 SNS5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
14 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
15 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
16 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
17 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
18 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
19 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
20 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
21 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
22 VMGND - GND
23 VMGND - GND
24 VMGND - GND
25 VMGND - GND

6-10
 Chapter 6

6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB

0020-5730

iPF810 / iPF820

1 1
J205 J201
1
J202

J101
1

1
J102

J203
1
1
J206 J204
1

F-6-2
T-6-28

J101
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 VMGND - GND
2 VMGND - GND
3 VMGND - GND
4 VMGND - GND
5 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
6 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
7 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
8 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
9 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
10 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
11 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
12 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
13 SNS5V IN Power supply(+5V)
14 SNS5V IN Power supply(+5V)
15 GND - GND
16 +3.3V IN Power supply(+3.3V)
17 +3.3V IN Power supply(+3.3V)
18 GND - GND
19 VH_MONI2 OUT VH control signal 2
20 VH_ENB IN VH power ON/OFF signal
21 VH_MONI1 OUT VH control signal 1
22 VMGND - GND
23 VMGND - GND
24 VMGND - GND
25 VMGND - GND

T-6-29

J201
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 H1-C-DATA-4-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 4(C)
2 GND - GND
3 /H1-C-HE-4_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 4(C)
4 GND - GND
5 H1-B-DATA-3-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 1(B)
6 GND - GND
7 H1-B-DATA-2-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 2(B)
8 GND - GND
9 PWLED4_ON IN Multi sensor LED4 drive control
10 MLT_SENS_2IN OUT Multi sensor signal 2
11 MLT_SENS_1IN OUT Multi sensor signal 1
12 /H3V_ON IN Power supply
13 PWLED3_ON IN Multi sensor LED3 drive control

6-11
 Chapter 6

J201
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
14 PWLED1_ON IN Multi sensor LED1 drive control
15 PWLED2_ON IN Multi sensor LED2 drive control
16 H1-DATA_LICC2 IN Head(L) analogue switch data signal
17 H1-DLD_LICC2 IN Head(L) analogue switch latch signal
18 H1-DASLK_LICC2 IN Head(L) analogue switch clock signal
19 VH_DIS IN VH selection single
20 GND - GND
21 H1-E-DATA-9-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 9(E)
22 GND - GND
23 /H1-E-HE-9_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 9(E)
24 GND - GND
25 H1-F-DATA-10-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 10(F)
26 GND - GND
27 H1-F-DATA-11-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 11(F)
28 GND - GND
29 /H1-F-HE-11_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 11(F)
30 GND - GND
31 H1-F-DATA-11-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 11(F)
32 GND - GND
33 /H1-F-HE-10_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 10(F)
34 GND - GND
35 H1-E-DATA-9-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 9(E)
36 GND - GND
37 H1-F-DATA-10-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 10(F)
38 GND - GND
39 H1-E-DATA-8-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 8(E)
40 GND - GND
41 /H1-E-HE-8_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 8(E)
42 GND - GND
43 H1-D-DATA-7-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 7(D)
44 GND - GND
45 H-DASH_LICC2 IN Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
46 /OUT_ENB IN Head data enable signal
47 /CRCOVER OUT Printhead fixer lever sensor output signal
48 /LIFT CAM IN - GND
49 ENCODER_B OUT Linear encoder output signal B
50 ENCODER_A OUT Linear encoder output signal A

T-6-30

J202
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 /H1-B-HE-2_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)
2 GND - GND
3 H1-A-DATA-1-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
4 GND - GND
5 H1-A-DATA-0-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
6 GND - GND
7 /H1-A-HE-0_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 0(A)
8 GND - GND
9 H1-A-DATA-0-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 0(A)
10 GND - GND
11 /H1-A-HE-1_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 1(A)
12 GND - GND
13 H1-A-DATA-1-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 1(A)
14 GND - GND
15 H1-B-DATA-2-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 2(B)
16 GND - GND
17 H1-B-DATA-3-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 3(B)
18 GND - GND
19 H1-C-DATA-4-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 4(C)
20 GND - GND
21 /H1-B-HE-3_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
22 GND - GND
23 H1-C-DATA-5-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 5(C)
24 GND - GND

6-12
 Chapter 6

J202
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
25 /H1_LT_B IN Head(L) latch signal
26 GND - GND
27 LV_H1_CLKP IN Head(L) clock signal P
28 LV_H1_CLKN IN Head(L) clock signal N
29 GND - GND
30 H1-DSOUT1 OUT Head(L) temperature output signal 1
31 H1-DSOUT2 OUT Head(L) temperature output signal 2
32 GND - GND
33 H1-C-DATA-5-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
34 GND - GND
35 /H1-C-HE-5_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
36 GND - GND
37 /H1-D-HE-6_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 6(D)
38 GND - GND
39 H1-D-DATA-6-OD_B IN Odd head(L) data signal 6(D)
40 GND - GND
41 H1-D-DATA-6-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 6(D)
42 GND - GND
43 H1-D-DATA-7-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 7(D)
44 GND - GND
45 /H1-D-HE-7_B IN Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
46 GND - GND
47 H1-E-DATA-8-EV_B IN Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
48 GND - GND
49 IO_ASIC_SCL IN/OUT Head ROM control signal(clock)
50 IO_ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal(data)

T-6-31

J205
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 ENCODER_B IN Linear encoder output signal B
2 GND - GND
3 ENCODER_A IN Linear encoder output signal A
4 SNS_5V OUT Power supply(+5V)

T-6-32

J206
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 SNS_5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
2 GND - GND
3 /CRCOVER IN Printhead fixer lever sensor output signal

T-6-33

J204
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 GND - GND
2 SNS5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
3 GND - GND
4 MLT_SENS_2IN IN Multi sensor signal 2
5 GND - GND
6 MLT_SENS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1
7 GND - GND
8 H1-C-DATA-4-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 4(C)
9 GND - GND
10 /H1-C-HE-4 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 4(C)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-B-DATA-3-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 3(B)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-B-DATA-2-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 2(B)
15 GND - GND
16 /H1-B-HE-2 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)
17 GND - GND
18 H1-A-DATA-1-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
19 GND - GND

6-13
 Chapter 6

J204
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
20 H1-A-DATA-0-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
21 GND - GND
22 /H1-A-HE-0 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 0(A)
23 GND - GND
24 H1-A-DATA-0-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 0(A)
25 GND - GND
26 H1-A-DATA-1-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 1(A)
27 GND - GND
28 /H1-A-HE-1 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 1(A)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-B-DATA-2-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 2(B)
31 GND - GND
32 IO_ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal(data)
33 GND - GND
34 IO_ASIC_SCL OUT Head ROM control signal(clock)
35 GND - GND
36 /H1_LT OUT Head(L) latch signal
37 GND - GND
38 H1_CLK OUT Head(L) clock signal
39 GND - GND
40 H1-DSOUT1 IN Head(L) temperature output signal 1
41 GND - GND
42 H1-DSOUT2 IN Head(L) temperature output signal 2
43 GND - GND
44 H1-DLD_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch latch signal
45 GND - GND
46 H1-DATA_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch data signal
47 GND - GND
48 H1-DASLK_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch clock signal
49 GND - GND
50 H-DASH_LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal

T-6-34

J203
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 GND - GND
2 /LIFT CAM IN - GND
3 GND - GND
4 H1-B-DATA-3-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 3(B)
5 GND - GND
6 /H1-B-HE-3 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
7 GND - GND
8 H1-C-DATA-4-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 4(C)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-C-DATA-5-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 5(C)
11 GND - GND
12 /H1-C-HE-5 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-C-DATA-5-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
15 GND - GND
16 H1-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 7(D)
17 GND - GND
18 H1-D-DATA-6-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 6(D)
19 GND - GND
20 /H1-D-HE-6 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 6(D)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-D-DATA-6-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 6(D)
23 GND - GND
24 H1-D-DATA-7-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 7(D)
25 GND - GND
26 /H1-D-HE-7 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
27 GND - GND
28 H1-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-E-DATA-9-EV Even head(L) data signal 9(E)

6-14
 Chapter 6

J203
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
31 GND - GND
32 /H1-E-HE-9 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 9(E)
33 GND - GND
34 H1-F-DATA-10-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 10(F)
35 GND - GND
36 H1-F-DATA-11-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 11(F)
37 GND - GND
38 /H1-F-HE-11 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 11(F)
39 GND - GND
40 H1-F-DATA-11-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 11(F)
41 GND - GND
42 H1-F-DATA-10-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 10(F)
43 GND - GND
44 /H1-F-HE-10 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 10(F)
45 GND - GND
46 H1-E-DATA-9-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 9(E)
47 GND - GND
48 H1-E-DATA-8-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 8(E)
49 GND - GND
50 /H1-E-HE-8 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 8(E)

T-6-35

J102
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 GND - GND
2 VH1 2 OUT Power supply
3 VH2 (Feedback) IN VH2 feed back voltage
4 VH2 OUT Power supply
5 VH2 OUT Power supply
6 VH2 OUT Power supply
7 VH2 OUT Power supply
8 VH2 OUT Power supply
9 VH2 OUT Power supply
10 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
15 VH1 OUT Power supply
16 VH1 OUT Power supply
17 VH1 OUT Power supply
18 VH1 OUT Power supply
19 VH1 OUT Power supply
20 VH1 OUT Power supply
21 VH1 (Feedback) IN VH2 feed back voltage
22 GND - GND
23 GND - GND
24 H3V 1 Power supply
25 GND - GND
26 PWLED4 OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal
27 PWLED3 OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal
28 PWLED2 OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal
29 PWLED1 OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal
30 GND -

6-15
 Chapter 6

6.2.3 Head relay PCB

0020-5732

iPF810 / iPF820

J101
1
1

J102
1

J103

J501

J104

F-6-3
T-6-36

J103
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 H-DASH_LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
2 GND - GND
3 H1-DASLK_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch clock signal
4 GND - GND
5 H1-DATA_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch data signal
6 GND - GND
7 H1-DLD_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch latch signal
8 GND - GND
9 H1-DSOUT2 IN Head(L) temperature output signal 2
10 GND - GND
11 H1-DSOUT1 IN Head(L) temperature output signal 1
12 GND - GND
13 H1_CLK OUT Head(L) clock signal
14 GND - GND
15 /H1_LT OUT Head(L) latch signal
16 GND - GND
17 IO_ASIC_SCL OUT Head ROM control signal(clock)
18 GND - GND
19 IO_ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal(data)
20 GND - GND
21 H1-B-DATA-2-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 2(B)
22 GND - GND
23 /H1-A-HE-1 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 1(A)
24 GND - GND
25 H1-A-DATA-1-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 1(A)
26 GND - GND
27 H1-A-DATA-0-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 0(A)
28 GND - GND
29 /H1-A-HE-0 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 0(A)
30 GND - GND
31 H1-A-DATA-0-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
32 GND - GND
33 H1-A-DATA-1-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
34 GND - GND
35 /H1-B-HE-2 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)
36 GND - GND
37 H1-B-DATA-2-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 2(B)
38 GND - GND
39 H1-B-DATA-3-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 3(B)
40 GND - GND

6-16
 Chapter 6

J103
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
41 /H1-C-HE-4 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 4(C)
42 GND - GND
43 H1-C-DATA-4-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 4(C)
44 GND - GND
45 MLT_SENS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1
46 GND - GND
47 MLT_SENS_2IN IN Multi sensor signal 2
48 GND - GND
49 SNS5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
50 GND - GND

T-6-37

J102
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 /H1-E-HE-8 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 8(E)
2 GND - GND
3 H1-E-DATA-8-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 8(E)
4 GND - GND
5 H1-E-DATA-9-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 9(E)
6 GND - GND
7 /H1-F-HE-10 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 10(F)
8 GND - GND
9 H1-F-DATA-10-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 10(F)
10 GND - GND
11 H1-F-DATA-11-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 11(F)
12 GND - GND
13 /H1-F-HE-11 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 11(F)
14 GND - GND
15 H1-F-DATA-11-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 11(F)
16 GND - GND
17 H1-F-DATA-10-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 10(F)
18 GND - GND
19 /H1-E-HE-9 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 9(E)
20 GND - GND
21 H1-E-DATA-9-EV Even head(L) data signal 9(E)
22 GND - GND
23 H1-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
24 GND - GND
25 /H1-D-HE-7 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
26 GND - GND
27 H1-D-DATA-7-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 7(D)
28 GND - GND
29 H1-D-DATA-6-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 6(D)
30 GND - GND
31 /H1-D-HE-6 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 6(D)
32 GND - GND
33 H1-D-DATA-6-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 6(D)
34 GND - GND
35 H1-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 7(D)
36 GND - GND
37 H1-C-DATA-5-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
38 GND - GND
39 /H1-C-HE-5 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
40 GND - GND
41 H1-C-DATA-5-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 5(C)
42 GND - GND
43 H1-C-DATA-4-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 4(C)
44 GND - GND
45 /H1-B-HE-3 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
46 GND - GND
47 H1-B-DATA-3-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 3(B)
48 GND - GND
49 /LIFT CAM IN - GND
50 GND - GND

6-17
 Chapter 6

T-6-38

J101
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 GND -
2 PWLED1 OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal
3 PWLED2 OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal
4 PWLED3 OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal
5 PWLED4 OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal
6 GND - GND
7 H3V 1 Power supply
8 GND - GND
9 GND - GND
10 VH1 (Feedback) IN VH2 feed back voltage
11 VH1 OUT Power supply
12 VH1 OUT Power supply
13 VH1 OUT Power supply
14 VH1 OUT Power supply
15 VH1 OUT Power supply
16 VH1 OUT Power supply
17 GND - GND
18 GND - GND
19 GND - GND
20 GND - GND
21 GND - GND
22 VH2 OUT Power supply
23 VH2 OUT Power supply
24 VH2 OUT Power supply
25 VH2 OUT Power supply
26 VH2 OUT Power supply
27 VH2 OUT Power supply
28 VH2 (Feedback) IN VH2 feed back voltage
29 VH1 2 OUT Power supply
30 GND - GND

T-6-39

J104
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 VH3 OUT Power supply
2 VH3 OUT Power supply
3 VH3 OUT Power supply
4 VHT34 OUT Power supply
5 H0-F-DATA-10-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 10(F)
6 IO_ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal(data)
7 IO_ASIC_SCL OUT Head ROM control signal(clock)
8 VH2 OUT Power supply
9 H0-C-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(C)
10 H0-A-HE-1 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 1(A)
11 VH3 OUT Power supply
12 VH3 OUT Power supply
13 VH3 OUT Power supply
14 VH4 OUT Power supply
15 VH4 OUT Power supply
16 H0-E-DATA-9-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 9(E)
17 H0-F-HE-11 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 11(F)
18 H0-E-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(E)
19 H0-D-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(D)
20 H3V_0 OUT Power supply
21 H3V_0 OUT Power supply
22 H0-B-DATA-3-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 3(B)
23 H0-A-DATA-0-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 0(A)
24 H0-B-HE-2 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 2(B)
25 VH3 OUT Power supply
26 VH3 OUT Power supply
27 H0-D-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(D)
28 H0-E-HE-8 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 8(E)
29 H0-E-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(E)

6-18
 Chapter 6

J104
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
30 H0-F-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(E)
31 H0-E-HE-9 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 9(E)
32 H0-D-DATA-7-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 7(D)
33 H0-D-HE-6 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 6(D)
34 H0-C-DATA-5-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 5(C)
35 H0-C-DATA-4-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 4(C)
36 H0-A-DATA-1-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 1(A)
37 H0-A-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(A)
38 H0-B-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(B)
39 H0-C-HE-4 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 4(C)
40 H0-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 7(D)
41 H0-E-DATA-8-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 8(E)
42 H0-F-HE-10 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 10(F)
43 H0-F-DATA-11-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 11(F)
44 H0-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 8(E)
45 H0-D-DATA-6-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 6(D)
46 H0-C-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(C)
47 H0-C-DATA-5-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 5(C)
48 H0-B-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(B)
49 H0-A-HE-0 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 0(A)
50 H0-B-DATA-2-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 2(B)
51 H0-B-DATA-3-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 3(B)
52 H0-C-DATA-4-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 4(C)
53 GND - GND
54 GND - GND
55 GND - GND
56 H0-F-DATA-11-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 11(F)
57 H0-E-DATA-9-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 9(E)
58 GND - GND
59 H0-D-DATA-6-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 6(D)
60 H0-C-HE-5 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 5(C)
61 H0-B-HE-3 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 3(B)
62 H0-A-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(A)
63 H0-A-DATA-1-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 1(A)
64 GND - GND
65 GND - GND
66 GND - GND
67 GND - GND
68 H0-F-DATA-10-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 10(F)
69 H0-F-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(F)
70 H0-D-HE-7 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 7(D)
71 GND - GND
72 H0_CLK OUT Head(R) clock signal
73 H0_LT OUT Head(R) latch signal
74 H0-B-DATA-2-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 2(B)
75 H0-A-DATA-0-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 0(A)
76 GND - GND
77 GND - GND
78 GND - GND

T-6-40

J201
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 PWLED1 OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal
2 PWLED2 OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal
3 PWLED3 OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal
4 PWLED4 OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal
5 GND - GND
6 MLT_SNS_1 IN Multi sensor signal 1
7 MLT_SNS_2 IN Multi sensor signal 2
8 Vcc(5V) OUT Power supply (+5V)

6-19
 Chapter 6

6.3 Version Up

6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool

0013-9809

iPF810 / iPF820

Use of the following tools allows you to update the firmware of the main controller incorporated in the printer.
- imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool
- L Printer Service Tool
1. imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool
imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool is the same as that for user.

Procedure:
1) Start imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool.
2) Place the printer in the online mode.
3) Transfer the firmware data to the printer according to the instructions shown on the display.
4) The data shown on the LCD on the operation panel changes and the firmware is updated automatically.
5) When firmware update is completed, the printer will start again.

File transfer route:

USB, IEEE1394, network

2. L Printer Service Tool

Procedure:
1) Start L Printer Service Tool.
2) Place the printer in the online mode.
3) Specify the firmware file(.jdl) and then transfer it.
4) The data shown on the LCD on the operation panel changes and the firmware is updated automatically.
5) When firmware update is completed, the printer will start again.

File transfer route:

USB, IEEE1394, network

6-20
 Chapter 6

6.4 Service Tools

6.4.1 Tool List

0012-6675

iPF810 / iPF820

T-6-41

General-purpose tools Application

Long phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw

Phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw

Flat-head screwdriver Removing the E-ring

Needle-nose pliers Inserting and removing the spring parts

Hex key wrench Inserting and removing hexagonal screws

Flat brush Applying grease

Lint free paper Wiping off ink

Rubber gloves Preventing ink stains

T-6-42

Special-purpose tools Application

Grease MOLYKOTE PG-641 Applying to specified locations

(CK-0562-000)

Grease PERMALUBE G-2 Applying to specified locations

(CK-0551-020)

Cover switch tool Pressing the cover switch

(QY9-0103-000)

6-21
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE
 Contents

Contents

7.1 Service Mode .................................................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Service Mode Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.4 Sample Printout.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.2 Special Mode................................................................................................................................................................7-21
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-21
 Chapter 7

7.1 Service Mode

7.1.1 Service Mode Operation

0013-9799

iPF810 / iPF820

a. How to enter the Service mode

Enter the Service mode following the procedure below.
1) Turn off the printer.
2) Turn on the printer while holding down the [Paper Source]key and [Information]key.
3) "S" will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display showing the firmware version of the printer.
4) After display of "Online", pressing the [Menu] key displays the SERVICE MODE top menu and the MESSAGE LED flashes.

* The Service mode is added to the options in the Main menu. The Service mode can be entered even in the error status(when an error message is shown on the
display)by turning the power off and then using the above key operation.

b. How to exit the Service mode

Turn off the printer.

c. Key operation in the service mode

- Selecting menus and paremeters:[ ] or [ ] key
- Going to the next lower-level menu:[ ] key
- Going to the previous higher-level menu:[ ] key
- Determining a selected menu or parameter:[OK] key

7-1
 Chapter 7

7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode

0020-5734

iPF810 / iPF820

The hierarchy of menus and parameters in the Service Mode is as shown below.
T-7-1

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
DISPLAY PRINTINF YES/NO : Select YES to execute
print
SYSTEM S/N
TYPE
LF TYPE
TMP
SIZE LF
SIZE LF
SIZE CR
SIZE CR
HEAD S/N
LOT
INK C
---
BK
WARNING 1
---
20
ERROR 1
---
20
INK CHECK 00000
I/O DISPLAY I/O DISPLAY 1
I/O DISPLAY 2
ADJUST PRINT PATTERN NOZZLE 1 : Press the [OK] button to
execute
OPTICAL AXIS : Press the [OK] button to
execute
LF TUNING
LF TUNING 2
HEAD ADJ. MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL : Press the [OK]
button to execute
BASIC : Press the [OK]
button to execute
ADJ. SETTING A A-1 : Adjustment value
entry
---
A-48 : Adjustment value
entry
---
F F-1 : Adjustment value
entry
F-2 : Adjustment value
entry
SAVE SETTINGS YES/NO
RESET SETTINGS YES/NO
NOZZLE CHK POS. YES/NO
GAP CALIB. YES/NO
CHANGE LF TYPE 0/1
CR REG EXECUTE YES/NO
RESET YES/NO
REPLACE CUTTER YES/NO

7-2
 Chapter 7

T-7-2

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
COUNTER PRINTER LIFE TTL
LIFE ROLL UPPER
LIFE ROLL LOWER
LIFE CUTSHEET
LIFE A
---
LIFE F
POWER ON
W-INK
CUTTER
WIPE
CARRIAGE PRINT
DRIVE
CR COUNT
CR DIST.
PRINT COUNT
PURGE CLN-A-1
CLN-A-2
CLN-A-3
CLN-A-6
CLN-A-7
CLN-A-10
CLN-A-11
CLN-A-15
CLN-A-16
CLN-A-17
CLN-A-TTL
CLN-M-1
CLN-M-4
CLN-M-5
CLN-M-6
CLN-M-TTL
CLEAR CLR-INK CONSUME
CLR-MTC EXC.
CLR-HEAD EXC.
CLR-UNIT A EXC. CLR A-1 EXC.
---
CLR A-5 EXC.
CLR-UNIT D EXC. CLR D-1 EXC.
---
CLR D-5 EXC.
CLR-UNIT H EXC. CLR H-1 EXC.
CLR H-2 EXC.
CLR-UNIT K EXC.
CLR-UNIT M EXC.
CLR-UNIT P EXC.
CLR-UNIT S EXC.
CLR-UNIT T EXC.
CLR-UNIT V EXC.
CLR-UNIT Y EXC.
CLR-FACTORY CNT.

7-3
 Chapter 7

T-7-3

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
COUNTER EXCHANGE MTC EXC.
HEAD EXC.
BOARD EXC.(M/B)
UNIT A EXC. A-1 EXC.
---
A-5 EXC.
UNIT D EXC. D-1 EXC.
---
D-5 EXC.
UNIT H EXC. H-1 EXC.
H-2 EXC.
UNIT K EXC.
UNIT M EXC.
UNIT P EXC.

UNIT V EXC.
UNIT Y EXC.
DETAIL-CNT MOVE PRINTER
N-INK CHK(C)
---
N-INK CHK(BK)
MEDIACONFIG-CNT
INK-USE1 INK-USE1(C)
---
INK-USE1(BK)
INK-USE1(TTL)
N-INK-USE1(C)
---
N-INK-USE1(BK)
N-INK-USE1(TTL)
INK-USE2 INK-USE2(C)
---
INK-USE2(BK)
INK-USE2(TTL)
N-INK-USE2(C)
---
N-INK-USE2(BK)
N-INK-USE2(TTL)
INK-EXC INK-EXC(C)
---
INK-EXC(BK)
INK-EXC(TTL)
N-INK-EXC(C)
---
N-INK-EXC(BK)
N-INK-EXC(TTL)

7-4
 Chapter 7

T-7-4

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
COUNTER MEDIA 1 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL UPPER
ROLL UPPER
ROLL LOWER
ROLL LOWER
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
---
MEDIA 7 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL UPPER
ROLL UPPER
ROLL LOWER
ROLL LOWER
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIA OTHER NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL UPPER
ROLL UPPER
ROLL LOWER
ROLL LOWER
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIASIZE1 ROLL P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 44-60
P-CNT 36-44
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17

7-5
 Chapter 7

T-7-5

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
COUNTER MEDIASIZE2 ROLL D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 44-60
D-CNT 36-44
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE1 CUT P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 44-60
P-CNT 36-44
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE2 CUT D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 44-60
D-CNT 36-44
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17

7-6
 Chapter 7

T-7-6

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
COUNTER HEAD DOT CNT. 1 C
---
BK
TTL
HEAD DOT CNT. 2 C
---
BK
TTL
PARTS CNT. COUNTER A OK/W1/W2/E
PARTS A1 1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
---
COUNTER Y OK/W1/W2/E
PARTS Y1 1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
SETTING Pth ON/OFF
RTC DATE XXXX/XX/XX : Date entry
TIME XX:XX : Time entry
PV AUTO JUDGE ON/PFF
INITIALIZE WARNIG : Press the [OK] button to clear
ERROR : Press the [OK] button to clear
ADJUST : Press the [OK] button to clear
W-INK : Press the [OK] button to clear
CARRIAGE : Press the [OK] button to clear
PURGE : Press the [OK] button to clear
INK-USE CNT : Press the [OK] button to clear
W-INK-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to clear
HEAD-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to clear
HDD BOX PASS. ALL FOLDERS : Press the [OK] button to
clear
FOLDER 1 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
---
FOLDER 29 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
PARTS-CHG CNT PARTS A PARTS A1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear
---
PARTS Y1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear
PARTS COUNTER PARTS A PARTS A1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear
---
PARTS Y1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear

7-7
 Chapter 7

7.1.3 Details of Service Mode

0020-5736

iPF810 / iPF820

This section provides details of the Service mode menu.

a) DISPLAY
Displays and prints the printer information.

1) PRINF INF
Prints adjustment values in the User menu, [DISPLAY] and [COUNTER] parameters on A4-size or lager paper.
When a roll media is used, the layout is optimized according to the media width.

2) SYSTEM
Displays the printer information shown below.
T-7-7

Display Description Unit

S/N Serial number of printer -
TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB -
* iPF8100/8000S/8000/820/810 is represented by 44.
LF TYPE Feed roller type: 0 or 1 -
TMP Ambient temperature degrees C
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) mm
0 is always detected for the roll media.
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) inch
0 is always detected for the roll media.
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) mm
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) inch

3) HEAD
Displays the following EEPROM information of the printhead.
T-7-8

Display Description
S/N Serial number of printhead
LOT Lot number of printhead

4) INK
Displays the numbers of days passed since installation of the following ink tanks.
T-7-9

Display Description Unit

BK Number of days passed since the BK ink tank was installed Day(s)
MBK Number of days passed since the MBK ink tank was installed Day(s)
C Number of days passed since the C ink tank was installed Day(s)
M Number of days passed since the M ink tank was installed Day(s)
Y Number of days passed since the Y ink tank was installed Day(s)

5) WARNING
Displays the warning history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.

6) ERROR
Displays the error history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.

7) INK CHECK
Displays the history of execution of turning off the remaining ink level detection (by using the refilled ink tank) in the order of C, M, Y, MBK, and BK.
0: No execution
1: Executed at least once

7-8
 Chapter 7

b) I/O DISPLAY
The information of each sensor and switch is shown in the display.

Sensor and switch status is shown in the display.

ON=1 OFF or not used=0
ON = 1
OFF or not used = 0

Screen 1
T-7-10

I / O D I S P L A Y 1 Upper row
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lower row

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (Display position)

Screen 2
T-7-11

I / O D I S P L A Y 2 Upper row
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lower row

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (Display position)

Screens 1 and 2 are selectable with the [ ] and [ ] buttons.

These screens display the associated sensor status as listed in the table below.
T-7-12

Display
Sensor name LCD display contents
position
1 Pump Cam Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
2 Valve open/closed detection sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
3 (Not Used) -
4 Agitation cam sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
5 (Not Used) -
6 Lift cam sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
7 Feed roller HP sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
8 Upper cover lock switch 0: Cover open , 1: Cover close
9 Printhead fixer lever sensor 0: Cover open , 1: Cover close
10 Ink tank cover switch 0: Cover open , 1: Cover close
11 (Not Used) -
12 (Not Used) -
13 (Not Used) -
14 (Not Used) -
15 (Not Used) -
16 (Not Used) -
17 (Not Used) -
18 (Not Used) -
19 (Not Used) -
20 Cutter HP sensor 0: Sensor OFF , 1: Sensor ON
21 Cutter left position sensor 0: Sensor OFF , 1: Sensor ON
22 Carriage HP sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
23 Pressure release switch 0: Realeased , 1:Pressured
24 Media sensor 0: No media , 1: Media loaded
25 (Not Used) -
26 (Not Used) -
27 (Not Used) -
28 Media take-up unit detection 0: Undetected 1: Detected
29 Media take-up sensor input signal 0: LO , 1: HI
30 (Not Used) -
31 (Not Used) -
32 (Not Used) -

7-9
 Chapter 7

c) ADJUST
Performs adjustments and prints the adjustment and check patterns necessary for adjusting the printer parts.

1) PRINT PATTERN
T-7-13

Display Description

NOZZLE 1 Prints the nozzle check pattern by single direction/ single pass without using the non-
discharging back up.
It is used to check for the non-discharging nozzles.
- Media size: A4
- Media type: any
OPTICAL AXIS Prints the pattern and adjusts the optical axis of the multi sensor.
For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure
after replacing the carriage unit or multi sensor".
- Media type: photo glossy paper

LF TUNING Carry out automatic correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after replacing the
feed roller and reed roller encoder".
- The media type is "gloss photo paper".
LF TUNING 2 Carry out manual correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after replacing the
feed roller and reed roller encoder".
- The media type is "gloss photo paper".

SENSOR CHECK are intended for factory adjustment purposes.

No adjustment by service personnel is required.

2) HEAD ADJ.
Set or initialize the registration adjustment values of each printheads.
T-7-14

Display Description

MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment.
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set values.

BASIC Prints the basic patterns for the manual head adjustment.
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set values.

ADJ. SETTING A to F A-1 to F-2 This mode is to input the registration adjustment values.
It is possible to return the values to the former one by printing the status print before changing the value.

SAVE SETTINGS Save the registration adjustment values that has been input.
RESET SETTINGS Initialize the registration adjustment values (to 0).

3) NOZZLE CHK POS.

This mode for adjusting the optical axis of the head management sensor. For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Pro-
cedure after replacing the head management sensor".
4) GAP CLIB.
This mode measures the gap between the printhead and media by multi sensor and corrects the calibration value.
5) CHANGE LF TYPE
Change the type of the feed roller.
0: Old feed roller
1: New feed roller

6) CR REG
Executes automatic head adjustment.
Make this adjustment if the resist remains partially misregistered after user-mode head adjustment.
EXECUTE: Execute automatic head adjustment.
RESET: Reset the resist adjustment value (0).

7-10
 Chapter 7

d) COUNTER
Displays the life (operation frequency and time) of each unit, print counts for each media type, and else.
The count values can be printed from [PRINT INF].

1) PRINTER: Counters related to product life

T-7-15

Display Description Unit

LIFE TTL Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE ROLL UPPER Cumulative number of printed upper roll media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE ROLL LOWER Cumulative number of printed lower roll media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE CUTSHEET Cumulative number of printed cut sheets (equivalent to A4) sheets
LIFE A-F Cumulative number of printed media for environments A to F sheets
POWER ON Cumulative power-on time (excluding the sleep time) Hours
W-INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge %
CUTTER Number of cutting operations (count as 1 by moving back and forth) Times
WIPE Number of wiping operations Times

2) CARRIAGE: Counters related to carriage unit

T-7-16

Display Description Unit

PRINT Cumulative printing time Hours
DRIVE Cumulative carriage moving time Hours
CR COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back and forth) Times
CR DIST. Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving 210mm) Times
PRINT COUNT Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping) Times

3) PURGE: Counters related to purge unit

7-11
 Chapter 7

T-7-17

Display Description Unit

CLN-A-1 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level adjusting) operations Times
CLN-A-3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling) operations Times
CLN-A-6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging) operations
CLN-A-10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling after secondary transportation) operations Times
CLN-A-11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-A-15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented ink agitation) operations Times
CLN-A-17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations Times
CLN-M-1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-M-4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from head after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-M-5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from head and tube before transportation ) operations Times
CLN-M-6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong suction) operations Times
CLN-M-TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations Times

4) CLEAR: Counters related to counter initialization

T-7-18

Display Description Unit

CLR-INK CONSUME Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing Times
CLR-MTC EXC. Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing Times
CLR-HEAD EXC. Cumulative count of printhead replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT A EXC. Cumulative count of unit A(waste ink system) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT D EXC. Cumulative count of unit D(carriage unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT H EXC. Cumulative count of unit H(purge unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT K EXC. Cumulative count of unit K(head management sensor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT M EXC. Cumulative count of unit M(carriage motor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT P EXC. Cumulative count of unit P(feed motor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT S EXC. Cumulative count of unit S(upper pick-up roller) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT T EXC. Cumulative count of unit T(lower pick-up roller) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT V EXC. Cumulative count of unit V(mist fan unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT Y EXC. Cumulative count of unit Y(cutter) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-FACTORY CNT. For factory Times

5) EXCHANGE: Counters related to parts replacement

T-7-19

Display Description Unit

MTC EXC. Maintenance cartridge replacement count Times
HEAD EXC. Printhead replacement count Times
BOARD EXC.(M/B) Main controller PCB replacement count Times
UNIT A EXC. Unit A (waste ink system) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS A])
UNIT D EXC. Unit D (carriage unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS D])
UNIT H EXC. Unit H (purge unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS H1])
UNIT K EXC. Unit K (head management sensor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS K1])
UNIT M EXC. Unit M (carriage unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS M1])
UNIT P EXC. Unit P (feed motor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS P1])
UNIT S EXC. Unit S (upper pick-up roller) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS S1])
UNIT T EXC. Unit P (lower pick-up roller) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS T1])
UNIT V EXC. Unit V (mist fan unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS V1])
UNIT Y EXC. Unit Y (cutter) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS Y1])

7-12
 Chapter 7

6) DETAIL-CNT: Other counters

T-7-20

Display Description Unit

MOVE PRINTER A(B,C,D,E) A: Number of times "MOVE PRINTER" on Main menu is executed Times
B: Number of times "LEVEL 1" is executed
C: Number of times "LEVEL 2" is executed
D: Number of times "LEVEL 3" is executed
E: "LEVEL" of previously executed "MOVE PRINTER"

N-INKCHK(XX) XX: Ink color Times

Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each color
MEDIACONFIG-CNT Count of media registered by media editor Times

7) INK-USE1: Counters related to ink consumption

T-7-21

Display Description Unit

INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink
INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic ink ml

N-INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml

Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink
N-INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of the cumulative consumption of refilled ink ml

8) INK-USE2: Counters related to ink consumption

T-7-22

Display Description Unit

INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank.
INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml
N-INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank
N-INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml

9) INK-EXC: Counters related to ink tank replacement

T-7-23

Display Description Unit

INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement
INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of tho cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement ml

N-INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml

Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement
N-INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of tho cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement ml

10) MEDIA x (x: 1 to 7): Counters related to media

One to seven media types are displayed individually in order with large cumulative print area.
T-7-24

Display Description Unit

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) m2
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL UPPER Cumulative print area of upper roll media (metric) m2
ROLL UPPER Cumulative print area of upper roll media (inch) Sq.f
ROLL LOWER Cumulative print area of lower roll media (metric) m2
ROLL LOWER Cumulative print area of lower roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) m2
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f

7-13
 Chapter 7

11) MEDIA OTHER: Counters related to media

Displays the total amount of cumulative print area of the other media type than the above-mentioned
T-7-25

Display Description Unit

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) m2
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL UPPER Cumulative print area of upper roll media (metric) m2
ROLL UPPER Cumulative print area of upper roll media (inch) Sq.f
ROLL LOWER Cumulative print area of lower roll media (metric) m2
ROLL LOWER Cumulative print area of lower roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) m2
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f

12) MEDIASIZE1 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

T-7-26

Display Description Unit

P-SQ 44-60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ 36-44 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ 17-24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-CNT 44-60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT 36-44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT 17-24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets

13) MEDIASIZE2 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

T-7-27

Display Description Unit

D-SQ 44-60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ 36-44 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ 17-24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-CNT 44-60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT 36-44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT 17-24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets

7-14
 Chapter 7

14) MEDIASIZE1 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

T-7-28

Display Description Unit

P-SQ 44-60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ 36-44 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ 17-24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-CNT 44-60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT 36-44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT 17-24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets

15) MEDIASIZE2 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

T-7-29

Display Description Unit

D-SQ 44-60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ 36-44 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ 17-24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-CNT 44-60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT 36-44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT 17-24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets

16) HEAD DOT CNT.1: Counter related to dot count

T-7-30

Display Description Unit

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead
TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead (x 1,000,000) dots

17) HEAD DOT CNT.2: Counter related to dot count

T-7-31

Display Description Unit

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Cumulative dot counts of each colors
TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors (x 1,000,000) dots

7-15
 Chapter 7

18) PARTS CNT. : Counter related to consumable parts

T-7-32

Display Description Unit

COUNTER x x: Unit number of consumable parts Day(s)
(For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")

Display the status and the days passed since the counter resetting.
- Status
OK: Use rate (until part replacement) of all consumable parts included in each unit are below 90%.
W1: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached
90% or more.
W2: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached
100%, but no need to stop the printer.
E : Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached
100%, and the printer needs to be stopped.
PARTS yy 1: yy: Unit number of consumable parts
(For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Counter of the consumable part (current)
2: Life of the consumable part
3: Use rate until part replacement %
4: Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)

7-16
 Chapter 7

f) SETTING
Make various settings.

1) Pth
Turn on or off the head pulse rank control function.
Default: OFF

2) RTC
Set RTC (real time clock) after replacing the lithium battery on the main controller PCB.
T-7-33

Display Description
DATE yyyy/mm/dd Set date
TIME hh:mm Set time

3) PV AUTO JUDGE
Sets ink saver mode.
Default: OFF

g) INITIALIZE
Clear the [DISPLAY] histories, [ADJUST] settings, [COUNTER] values, and other parameters.
T-7-34

Display Description
WARNING Initialize the history of WARNING.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] will be initialized.)
ERROR Initialize the history of ERROR.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [ERROR] will be initialized.)
ADJUST Initialize the value of band adjustment (by user) and head adjustment.
The automatically adjusted value will not be initialized.
W-INK Initialize the remaining capacity (%) of the maitenance cartridge.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PRINTER] > [W-INK])
CARRIAGE Initialize the counter related to carriage unit.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [CARRIAGE])
PURGE Initialize the counter related to purge unit.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PURGE])
INK-USE CNT Initialize the consumption amount of ink.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [INK-USE2], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-INK CONSUME])
W-INK-CHG CNT Initialize the maintenance cartridge replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [MTC EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-MTC EXC.])
HEAD-CHG CNT Initialize the printhead replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [HEAD EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-HEAD
EXC.])
HDD BOX PASS. Initialize the BOX password of the hard disk drive to factory default.
PARTS-CHG CNT PARTS xx xx: Unit number of consumable parts
(For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the consumable part replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [UNIT x EXC], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-UNIT x
EXC.])
PARTS COUNTER PARTS xx xx: Unit number of consumable parts
(For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the counter amount of the consumable parts.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PARTS CNT.] > [PARTS x])
* After replacing the consumable part, be sure to execute this menu.

7-17
 Chapter 7

7.1.4 Sample Printout

0020-5737

iPF810 / iPF820

a) PRINTINF
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [PRINTINF] is shown below, along with instructions about how to interpret it.

xxxx PRINT INF

(1) Firm:00.49 Boot:00.31 MIT(DBF):9303 MIT(DB):1.02 S/N:DF029090
(2) SYSTEM
TYPE:DF029090 24 0 TMP:26 SIZE_LF: 0.0 SIZE_CR: 514.3
HEAD S/N:39410000
HEAD LOT:166L09A0
INK
C :0 M :0 Y :0 MBK :0MBK2 :0 BK :0
WARNING
01:0000 02:0000 03:0000 04:0000 05:0000
06:0000 07:0000 08:0000 09:0000 10:0000
11:0000 12:0000 13:0000 14:0000 15:0000
16:0000 17:0000 18:0000 19:0000 20:0000
ERROR
01:03060A00-2E01 02:0000 03:0000 04:0000 05:0000
06:0000 07:0000 08:0000 09:0000 10:0000
11:0000 12:0000 13:0000 14:0000 15:0000
16:0000 17:0000 18:0000 19:0000 20:0000
INK CHK: C:0 M:0 Y:0 MBK:0 MBK2:0 BK:0
(3) COUNTER
PRINTER
LIFE TTL:0
LIFE ROLL:0 LIFE CUTSHEET:0
LIFE A:0 B:0 C:0 D:0 E:0 F:0

MEDIA 7 MEDIA OTHER

NAME : NAME : OTHER
TTL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f TTL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f
ROLL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f ROLL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f
CUTSHEET : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f CUTSHEET : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f

PARTS COUNTER
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
COUNTER A : OK 36
PARTS A1 : 0.0 36.1 0% 0.0
PARTS A2 : 0.0 36.1 0% 0.0
COUNTER D : OK 36
PARTS D1 1362 13028571 0% 1362
PARTS D2 : 377 6700000 0% 377
PARTS D3 : 2238 16500000 0% 2238
COUNTER F : OK 36
PARTS F1 : 377 4000000 0% 377
COUNTER H : OK 36
PARTS H1 : 15 50000 0% 15
COUNTER K : OK 36
PARTS K1 : 4 12500 0% 4
COUNTER M : OK 36
PARTS M1 : 0 750 0% 0

(4) PV AUTO JUDGE : ON(NORMAL) , 1

(a) (b)
F-7-1
(1) Version numbers of the firmware installed in the printer, boot ROM, and MIT DB format

(2) Printer information

For more item details, see "Detail of Service Mode" > "a) Display".

(3) Counter information

For more item details, see "Detail of Service Mode" > "e) Counter".
(a) Consumables status
(b) Number of days elapsed since the counter was last reset
(c) Counter value
(d) Value with which consumables reach their replacement timing
(e) Ratio of the current count to the replacement timing
(f) Cumulative counter value

(4) Ink saver mode setting

(a) Ink saver mode status
(b) Number of times ink save mode has been executed (unit: times).

7-18
 Chapter 7

b) NOZZLE 1
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]> [NOZZLE 1] is shown below.

Nozzle Check Pattern SERVICE

F-7-2

c) OPTICAL AXIS
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]> [OPTICAL AXIS] is shown below.

F-7-3

7-19
 Chapter 7

d) DETAIL
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [HEAD ADJ.] > [MANUAL HEAD ADJ]> [DETAIL] is shown below.
Printhead Adjustment Pattern

A-1 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-9 A-11 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

A-2 A-4 A-6 A-8 A-10 A-12 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

14 14 14 14 14 14 14
6 6
16 16 16 16 16
8 8 8 8 8
18 18 18
10 10 10 10 10 10 10

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

Canon imagePROGRAF iPF600 Printhead Adjustment Pattern

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6

0 0 0 0 0 0

2 2 2 2 2 2

4 4 4 4 4 4

6 6 6 6 6 6

8 8 8 8 8 8

10 10 10 10 10 10

12 12 12 12 12 12

14 14 14 14 14 14

16 16 16 16 16 16

18 18 18 18 18 18

20 20 20 20 20 20

D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12

0 0 0 0 0 0

2 2 2 2 2 2

4 4 4 4 4 4

6 6 6 6 6 6

8 8 8 8 8 8

10 10 10 10 10 10

12 12 12 12 12 12

14 14 14 14 14 14

16 16 16 16 16 16

18 18 18 18 18 18

20 20 20 20 20 20

E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-5

0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4

F-1

0 2 4 6 8

10 12

F-7-4

7-20
 Chapter 7

e) BASIC
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [HEAD ADJ.] > [MANUAL HEAD ADJ]> [BASIC] is shown below.
Printhead Adjustment Pattern

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6

0 0 0 0 0 0

2 2 2 2 2 2

4 4 4 4 4 4

6 6 6 6 6 6

8 8 8 8 8 8

10 10 10 10 10 10

12 12 12 12 12 12

14 14 14 14 14 14

16 16 16 16 16 16

18 18 18 18 18 18

20 20 20 20 20 20

D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12

0 0 0 0 0 0

2 2 2 2 2 2

4 4 4 4 4 4

6 6 6 6 6 6

8 8 8 8 8 8

10 10 10 10 10 10

12 12 12 12 12 12

14 14 14 14 14 14

16 16 16 16 16 16

18 18 18 18 18 18

20 20 20 20 20 20

F-7-5

7-21
 Chapter 7

7.2 Special Mode

7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing

0013-9804

iPF810 / iPF820

This printer supports the following special modes in addition to the service mode:
- PCB replacement mode
- Download mode
- Counter display mode

1. PCB replacement mode

This mode is used when replacing the main PCB or MC relay PCB.
By executing this mode,
- Backup data of the settings and counter values stored in the MC relay PCB are moved to the new main PCB.
- The data such as the settings and counter values are copied to the MC relay PCB.

a) Entering the PCB replacement mode

Follow the same procedure as that for entering the service mode.
(With the "Paper Source" button and "Information" button pressed down, turn on the "Power" button.)
When the printer starts up, compare the serial number memorized in the main PCB's EEPROM with that memorized in the MC relay PCB's EEPROM. If they do
not match, or no serial number is memorized in either EEPROM, enter the PCB replacement mode.
While you are in the PCB replacement mode, the MESSAGE LED, roll media LED, and ONLINE LED are lit.

b) Procedure
Select "CPU BOARD" or "MC BOARD" using the [ ] and [ ] buttons, and then press the [OK] button to determine it.
- CPU BOARD
Select this after replacing the main PCB.
The data in the MC relay PCB is copied to the main PCB.

- MC BOARD
Select this before replacing the main PCB.
The data in the main PCB is copied to the MC relay PCB.
Use this when the MC relay PCB is a new one.

c) Exiting the PCB replacement mode

Turning off the Power button of the printer allows you to exit the PCB replacement mode.

For details on how to replace the PCB, see Parts Replacement Procedure > Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Boards.

2. Download mode
Use this mode only when updating the firmware without performing initialization.

a) Entering the download mode

1) Turning off the Power button of the printer.
2) With the "Stop" and "Information" buttons pressed down, turn on the Power button of the printer.
* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.

b) Procedure
When "Download Mode/Send Firmware" is shown on the display, transfer the firmware.
When downloading of the firmware is completed, the printer is turned off automatically.

3. Counter display mode

Use this mode to view only printer counter information.

a) Invoking counter display mode

1) Press the [MENU] button to keep [Information] > [System Info] selected.
2) Press the [ ] button whole holding down the [MENU] button + [OK] button to invoke counter display mode.

b) How to view counter display mode

- S/N: Unit serial number
- CNT: Number of copies printed in A4 terms (unit: copies)

7-22
Chapter 8 ERROR CODE
 Contents

Contents

8.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Warning Table................................................................................................................................................................8-2
8.2.1 Warnings ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Error Table .....................................................................................................................................................................8-4
8.3.1 Errors............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4 Sevice Call Table .........................................................................................................................................................8-11
8.4.1 Service Call Errors ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-11
 Chapter 8

8.1 Outline

8.1.1 Outline
0020-5742

iPF810 / iPF820

The printer indicates errors using the display and LEDs.

If an error occurs during printing, the printer status is also displayed on the status monitor of the printer driver.
The following three types of errors are displayed on the display:
- Warning
Status where the print operation can be continued without remedying the cause of the problem. This can, however, adversely affect the printing results.
- Error
Status where the print operation is stopped, and the regular operation cannot be recovered until the cause of the problem is remedied.
- Service call error
When a service call error occurs, the error is not cleared and the error indication remains on the operation panel even if the printer is powered off and on again.
(Occurrence of the service call error is indicated again at power-on.)
This measure is taken to prevent user's recovery of the service call error and damages to the printer.
Service call errors can be cleared, however, by starting up the printer in the service mode.

For how to take actions against warnings and errors, refer to "Troubleshooting".

Overview of warnings and error codes

The codes of warnings and errors are shown below acording to the system.
T-8-1

Code Diagnosis
0181xxxx-xxxx Ink warning
0180xxxx-xxxx Printhead warning
0184xxxx-xxxx Maintenance cartridge warning
0134xxxx-xxxx GARO warning
0303xxxx-xxxx Cover error
0301xxxx-xxxx Media error
0306xxxx-xxxx
0386xxxx-xxxx
0313xxxx-xxxx Sensors, fans, motors error
0380xxxx-xxxx Printhead error
0381xxxx-xxxx Ink error
0383xxxx-xxxx
0384xxxx-xxxx Maintenance cartridge error
0387xxxx-xxxx Cutter unit error
0389xxxx-xxxx Media take-up unit error
0390xxxx-xxxx Firmware error
Exxx-xxxx Service call error

* "x" stands for a numeric or letter.

8-1
 Chapter 8

8.2 Warning Table

8.2.1 Warnings
0020-5741

iPF810 / iPF820

* Codes represent the numbers that are displayed in DISPLAY in service mode and that are recorded in PRINTINF. Messages that are not accompanied by a code
indication are not logged.

T-8-2

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Ink Level: Check 0180104-1000 BK ink tank near-empty Renew the ink tanks.
Ink Level: Check 0180101-1001 Y ink tank near-empty
Ink Level: Check 0180102-1002 M ink tank near-empty
Ink Level: Check 0180103-1003 C ink tank near-empty
Ink Level: Check 0180106-1006 MBK ink tank near-empty
Ink Level: Check 0180106-1007 MBK2 ink tank near-empty
Problem with Printhead. 01800500-1010 Number of non-discharging nozzles in printhead: Clean the printheads. Renew the printheads.
Chk printing results Warning level Identify the head management sensor unit.
Prepare for maint cart 01841001-281A Maintenance cartridge near-full Replace the maintenance cartridge.
replacement.
Prepare for parts Parts counter W1 level Check the parts counter in service mode.
replacement.
Call for service.
Parts replacement time has Parts counter W2 level After checking the parts counter in service mode,
passed. replace any part whose counter is nearing the error
Call for service. value.
GARO W1221 01341221-1030 GARO (image mode): Unknown command Verify the transmitted data before reprinting.
GARO W1222 01341222-1031 GARO (image mode): Invalid parameter count (no
parameters)
GARO W1223 01341223-1032 GARO (image mode): Required parameter missing
GARO W1225 01341225-1034 GARO (image mode): Other warning
GARO W1226 01341226-103A GARO (image mode): Image processing table error
GARO W1231 01341231-1035 GARO (setup): Unknown command
GARO W1232 01341232-1036 GARO (setup): Invalid parameter count
GARO W1233 01341233-1037 GARO (setup): Required parameter missing
GARO W1234 01341234-1038 GARO (setup): Data out of bounds
GARO W1235 01341235-1039 GARO (setup): Other warning
End of paper feed. Forced feed limit Check the remaining quantity of roll media.
Cannot feed paper more.
This type of paper is not 01860006-1015 Non-support paper of HP-GL/2 Exchange for the compatible paper to HP-GL/2.
compatible with HP-GL/2.
GL2:W0501 01340501-1040 Memory full (HP-GL/2) Check if there is the non-image area of the print.
The memory is full. Verify the transmitted data before reprinting.
GL2:W0904 01340904-1048 Overflow of Polygon buffer (HP-GL/2)
The memory is full.
GL2:W0903 01340903-1047 Overflow of replot buffer (HP-GL/2)
The memory is full.
GL2:W0502 01340502-1041 Invalid parameter (HP-GL/2) Verify the transmitted data before reprinting.
The parameter is out of
range.
GL2:W0504 01340504-1043 Invalid command (HP-GL/2)
This command is not
supported.
Mail box nearly full. 011A1001-2901 The free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
Delete unwanted data printer's hard disk does not have more than 1 GB,
combined.
Mail box full. 01861003-2902 100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box. Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxs.
Now printing without
saving data.
Before borderless printing, 01861004-1049 The platen shutter is closed at the borderless printing. Open the corresponding platen shutter.
move the blue platen switch.
Blue platen switch is dirty. 01861004-1050 Platen shutter cleaning warning Clean the platen shutter.
Please clean the switch.
Not much ink is left. Prepare 01810103-1003 C ink tank near-empty Renew the C ink tank.
to replace the ink.
Not much ink is left. Prepare 01810102-1002 M ink tank near-empty Renew the M ink tank.
to replace the ink.
Not much ink is left. Prepare 01810101-1001 Y ink tank near-empty Renew the Y ink tank.
to replace the ink.
Not much ink is left. Prepare 01810106-1006 MBK ink tank near-empty Renew the MBK ink tank.
to replace the ink.
Not much ink is left. Prepare 01810104-1000 BK ink tank near-empty Renew the BK ink tank.
to replace the ink.

8-2
 Chapter 8

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Ink tank is empty. 01810303-1403 C ink tank empty Renew the C ink tank.
Replace the ink tank.
Ink tank is empty. 01810302-1402 M ink tank empty Renew the M ink tank.
Replace the ink tank.
Ink tank is empty. 01810301-1401 Y ink tank empty Renew the Y ink tank.
Replace the ink tank.
Ink tank is empty. 01810306-1406 MBK ink tank empty Renew the MBK ink tank.
Replace the ink tank.
Ink tank is empty. 01810304-1400 BK ink tank empty Renew the BK ink tank.
Replace the ink tank.
No ink tank loaded. 01810103-1413 C ink tank removal Attach the C ink tank.
Check ink tank.
No ink tank loaded. 01810102-1412 M ink tank removal Attach the M ink tank.
Check ink tank.
No ink tank loaded. 01810101-1411 Y ink tank removal Attach the Y ink tank.
Check ink tank.
No ink tank loaded. 01810106-1416 MBK ink tank removal Attach the MBK ink tank.
Check ink tank.
No ink tank loaded. 01810104-1410 BK ink tank removal Attach the BK ink tank.
Check ink tank.
The paper is too small. 013200D2-1051 Size clip error Check the media size check.
Change the media size.
Maximum jobs stored. 011A1006-2907 Saved jobs exceed the Personal Box capacity. Press the stop button to cancel the print job.
Delete unwanted data. Delete print jobs from the queue.
Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.

8-3
 Chapter 8

8.3 Error Table

8.3.1 Errors
0020-5740

iPF810 / iPF820

* Codes represent the numbers that are displayed in DISPLAY in service mode.
If the same message is displayed when the printer is turned off, then back on, take action as recommended in the Action column.

T-8-3

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

PHead needs cleaning. 03800500-280C Printhead found to have many non-discharging Clean the printhead. Identify the nozzles in a nozzle check
Press Online to clear nozzles during a non-discharging inspection (printing pattern. Replace the printhead.
error. paused)
Paper size not detected. 03010000-200C Unable to detect the leading end of paper Check the leading end of paper. Reload the paper.
Lift the release lever and
reload the paper.
Leading edge detection 03010000-200D Unable to detect the trailing end of cut sheet Check the sheet length. Check to see if paper has not
error. jammed.

Lift the release lever and

align leading edge with
orange line.
Paper size not detected. 03010000-2017 Paper (right) edge detection error Check the right edge of paper. Check the paper type.
Lift the release lever and
reload the paper.
Paper size not detected. 03010000-2018 Paper (left) edge detection error Check the left edge of paper. Check the paper type.
Lift the release lever and
reload the paper.
Cannot adjust printhead. 03863000-2820 Printhead registration unadjustable Check the paper on which a pattern is printed for smears.
Check the environment for interferences from outside
Press Online to clear the light.
error and readjust Clean the printhead.
printhead.
Cannot adjust printhead. 03863000-2821 LF unadjustable Check the paper on which a pattern is printed for smears.
Check the environment for interferences from outside
Press Online to clear the light.
error and readjust Clean the printhead.
printhead.
Cannot print as specified. 03010000-2E1F Undersized paper loaded for internal printing (A4 or Replace with A4/Letter or any larger-sized paper.
larger)
Lift the release lever and
replace paper with A4/
LTR (vertical) or larger.
Cannot print as specified. 03010000-2E1F Undersized paper loaded for internal printing (A3 or Replace with A3/11"x17" or any larger-sized paper.
larger)
Lift the release lever and
replace paper with A3/
Ledger (vertical) or
larger.
Cannot print as specified. 03010000-2E1F Undersized paper loaded for internal printing (roll Replace with roll media at least 10 inches in width.
media)
Lift the release lever and
replace roll with 10 in.
wide or larger roll.
Cannot detect papr 03010000-2E25 Paper jam while feeding/ejecting/printing Remove the paper jam and reload the paper.

Remove paper and press

Load/Eject.
Cannot feed paper 03010000-2E27 Paper jam during feeding/printing/ejection Reload the paper.

Lift the release lever and

reload paper.
This paper cannot be 03010000-200E Undersized paper (cut sheets/roll media) Replace with larger-sized paper.
used.
Check supported paper
sizes.
This paper cannot be 03010000-200F Oversized paper (cut sheets/roll media) Replace with smaller-sized paper.
used.
Check supported paper
sizes.
Use another paper. 03010000-2F33 Unadjustable because of transparent media Replace with adjustable media.

Press Online to clear the

error.
Paper loaded askew. 03016000-2010 Skew Correct the skew in the paper and reload it.
Lift the release lever.

8-4
 Chapter 8

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Hardware error. 03130000-2E21 IEEE1394 interface error Check that the optionalIEEE1394 board is mounted.
03130000-2E21 Check the cable connection.

Turn off printer,wait,

then turn on again.
Paper size not detected. 03010000-200A Unable to detect the paper width (Paper loaded at an Reload the paper
Reload paper. improper position)
Paper jam. 03010000-2E27 Paper jam during feeding/printing/ejection Reload the paper

Press Load/Eject and

reload the paper.
Paper size not detected. 03010000-200C Roll media loading size detection failure Reload the roll media.
Lift the release lever and
reload the paper.
Cannot adjust eccentric. 03863000-2822 Eccentricity correction disabled Check to see if paper has not jammed.

Press Online to clear the

error.
Sheet printing is selected. 03860002-2E02 Data with a cut sheet specification has been received Load cut sheets at the paper tray port.
but no cut sheets are loaded.
Press Load/Eject and load
sheets.
Roll printing is selected, 03860002-2E0A Data with a roll media specification has been received Replace with roll media.
but sheets are loaded. when a cut sheet tray is loaded.

Press OK, remove the

sheets, and load a roll.
Roll printing is selected. 03060A00-2E00 Data with a roll media specification has been received Load roll media.
but no roll media are loaded.
Press Load/Eject and load
a roll.
No Roll Feed Unit. 03060A00-2E0E Roll media unit not installed Install the roll media unit.

Turn printer off and

install roll feed unit.
The roll is empty. 03060A00-2E1B Roll media end Renew the supply of roll media.

Lift the release lever and

replace the roll.
Wrong paper feed slot for 03061000-2E15 Paper type mismatch Check the type of paper that can be fed and reload the
this paper type. paper.

Press Load/Eject and

reload the paper.
Manual printing is 03860001-2E0C Data with a cut sheet specification has been received Load cut sheets at the paper tray port.
selected, but a roll is when roll media are loaded.
loaded.

Press Load/Eject and

remove the roll.
Hardware error. 03130031-291D Spur cam sensor detection failure Check the spur cam sensor.
03130031-291D

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2E23 Cutter unit failure Check the cutter unit.
03130031-2E23

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F14 Writing to the ASIC register disabled Replace the main controller PCB
03130031-2E14

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F16 Mist fan error Check the mist fan.
03130031-2E16

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F17 Suction fan lock detection error Check the suction fan.
03130031-2E17

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F20 Purge motor cam position error Check the purge unit.
03130031-2E20

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.

8-5
 Chapter 8

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Hardware error. 03130031-2F22 Pump travel timeout Check the purge unit.
03130031-2E22

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F23 Purge motor error Check the purge unit.
03130031-2E23 Pump inoperable

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F25 Unable to detect the carriage motor home position Check the carriage unit. Check the linear encoder for
03130031-2E25 smears.

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F26 Carriage inoperable Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts.
03130031-2E26

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F27 Carriage travel timeout Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts.
03130031-2E27

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F1F Pump cam sensor error Check the purge unit.
03130031-2E1F

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F2A Unable to detect the feed roller home position Check the feed roller encoder and surrounding part.
03130031-2E2A Check to see if paper has not jammed.

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03010000-2F29 Feed motor timeout (Roll media) Check the roll feed unit. Check roll media. Check to see
03130031-2E29 if paper has not jammed in the printer.

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F2E Roll travel timeout Check the roll feed unit.
03130031-2E2E

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-4027 Lift travel timeout error Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts.
03130031-4027

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F13 A/D converter external trigger output stop detection Replace the new printhead.
03130031-2E13 hardware error 1

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F32 Multi sensor error Check the environment for interferences from outside
03130031-2F32 light.
Replace the multi sensor unit.
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F3A Valve motor error Check the ink supply unit.
03130031-2F3A

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F3B CS communication error Remove the ink tanks and then reload them.
03130031-2F3B Check the main controller PCB.

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-260E Gap detection error Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts.
03130031-260E Replace the main controller PCB.

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2618 VH voltage error Check the power supply unit.
03130031-2618

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-260F Gap reference surface error Replace the reference surface sheet.
03130031-260F

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.

8-6
 Chapter 8

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Roll feed unit err 03060B00-2E24 Roll feed unit failure Replace the roll feed unit.

Turn off printer and

check roll feed unit
Unknown file. 03900001-4049 ROM data for another model has been transferred. Transmit valid ROM data.
Check file format.

Turn off printer, wait a

while, then turn it on
again.
Unknown file. 03900001-4042 MIT data transfer failure Verify the validity of MID data before transferring it.
Check file format.

Turn off printer, wait a

while, then turn it on
again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F2B LF operation failure Check to see if paper has not jammed.
03130031-2F2B Check the feed motor and feed roller.

Turn off printer, wait,

then turn on again.
Printhead error 03800200-2802 Invalid printhead installed Replace printhead

Open top cover and

replace the printhead.
Printhead error 03800300-2801 Printhead DI compensation failure Replace printhead

Open top cover and

replace the right
printhead.
Printhead error 03800400-2803 Printhead EEPROM error Replace printhead

Open top cover and

replace the right
printhead.
Hardware error. 03800500-2F2F Non-discharging error Identify the head management sensor unit
03800500-2F2F Replace the head management sensor unit
Replace the printhead
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03800500-2F30 Non-discharging position adjustment error Identify the head management sensor unit
03800500-2F30 Replace the head management sensor unit
Replace the printhead
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.
Ink tank is empty. 03810104-2500 Bk ink tank empty Renew the Bk ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink tank is empty. 03810101-2501 Y ink tank empty Renew the Y ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink tank is empty. 03810102-2502 M ink tank empty Renew the M ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink tank is empty. 03810103-2503 C ink tank empty Renew the C ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink tank is empty. 03810106-2506 MBk ink tank empty Renew the MBk ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink tank is empty. 03810106-2507 MBk2 ink tank empty Renew the MBk ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810204-2580 Low on the Bk ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished Bk ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810201-2581 Low on the Y ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished Y ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810202-2582 Low on the M ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished M ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810203-2583 Low on the C ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished C ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810206-2586 Low on the MBk ink tank (as during cleaning) Replace with a fully replenished MBk ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810204-2590 Low on the Bk ink tank (during pre-printing checks) Replace with a fully replenished Bk ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.

8-7
 Chapter 8

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Ink insufficient. 03810201-2591 Low on the Y ink tank (during pre-printing checks) Replace with a fully replenished Y ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810202-2592 Low on the M ink tank (during pre-printing checks) Replace with a fully replenished M ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810203-2593 Low on the C ink tank (during pre-printing checks) Replace with a fully replenished C ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink insufficient. 03810206-2596 Low on the MBk ink tank (during pre-printing checks) Replace with a fully replenished MBk ink tank
Press OK and replace ink
tank.
Ink tank error. 03830204-2540 Bk ink tank ID error Replace with a valid Bk ink tank

Press OK and replace ink

tank.
Ink tank error. 03830201-2541 Y ink tank ID error Replace with a valid Y ink tank

Press OK and replace ink

tank.
Ink tank error. 03830202-2542 M ink tank ID error Replace with a valid M ink tank

Press OK and replace ink

tank.
Ink tank error. 03830203-2543 C ink tank ID error Replace with a valid C ink tank

Press OK and replace ink

tank.
Ink tank error. 03830206-2546 MBk ink tank ID error Replace with a valid MBk ink tank

Press OK and replace ink

tank.
Ink tank error. 03830206-2547 MBk2 ink tank ID error Replace with a valid MBk ink tank

Press OK and replace ink

tank.
No ink tank loaded. 03830104-2520 BK ink tank not installed Install a Bk ink tank
Press OK and check ink
tank.
No ink tank loaded. 03830101-2521 Y ink tank not installed Install a Y ink tank
Press OK and check ink
tank.
No ink tank loaded. 03830102-2522 M ink tank not installed Install a M ink tank
Press OK and check ink
tank.
No ink tank loaded. 03830103-2523 C ink tank not installed Install a C ink tank
Press OK and check ink
tank.
No ink tank loaded. 03830106-2526 MBK ink tank not installed Install a MBk ink tank
Press OK and check ink
tank.
No ink tank loaded. 03830106-2527 MBK2 ink tank not installed Install a MBk ink tank
Press OK and check ink
tank.
Top cover is open. 03031000-2F38 Top cover abnormally open Close the top cover and turn on the printer again.

Turn off printer, wait a

while, and turn it on
again.
Ink tank cover is open. 03031000-2E10 Ink tank cover abnormally open Close the ink tank cover and turn on the printer again.

Turn off printer,wait a

while, and turn it on
again.
Maintenance cartridge 03841001-2819 Maintenance cartridge full Renew the maintenance cartridge.
full.

Replace the maintenance

cartridge.
No Maintenance 03841001-281B Not enough space in the maintenance cartridge prior Replace the maintenance cartridge.
Cartridge capacity. to cleaning

Replace the maintenance

cartridge.
Maintenance cartridge 03841201-2816 Maintenance cartridge EEPROM error Renew the maintenance cartridge.
problem.

Replace the maintenance

cartridge.

8-8
 Chapter 8

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Maintenance cartridge 03841201-2817 Maintenance cartridge ID error Renew the maintenance cartridge.
problem.

Replace the maintenance

cartridge.
Borderless printng not 03861001-2405 Paper loaded at a position inaccessible for borderless Check to see if a borderless printing spacer is installed.
possible. Check roll printing Reload the paper.
position.

Online: Print
Load/Eject:
Change Paper
Borderless printng not 03861001-2406 Data unfit for borderless printing Check the paper size.
possible. Check paper Change the paper size.
size setting.

Online: Print
Load/Eject:
Change Paper
Insufficient paper for job 03862000-2E09 Not enough roll media on remaining roll media Renew the supply of roll media.
quantity detection
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
Load/Eject:
Change Paper
Cannot cut paper. 03870001-2015 Cutting failure Cut paper manually.
Lift the release lever and Check the cutter.
reload the paper.
Cannot adjust optic axis. 03863000-2824 Optical axis error Check the multi sensor.
Check the head management sensor.
Press Online to clear the
error.
This type of paper is not 03061000-2E15 Non-support media of HP-GL/2 Exchange for the compatible paper to HP-GL/2 before
compatible with HP-GL/ reprinting.
2.

Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
Load/Eject:
Change Paper
Mail box full. 031A1001-2905 The job store executed when the free hard disk space Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
Delete unwanted data on left for Personal Boxes in the printer's hard disk is full.
your computer to resume
printing. Press Stop to
cancel printing.
Mail box full. 031A1006-2906 The store executed when 32 jobs are stored in the Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
Cannot save. Delete Personal Box.
unwanted data on your
computer to resume
printing.
Press Stop to cancel
printing.
Hard disk error. 031A1002-2908 Hard disk format error Press the [OK] button to start reformatting the hard disk.
Press OK to reformat When formatting is finished, the printer automatically
restarts.
File read error. 031A1002-2909 Hard disk file error Restart the printer. Only the corrupted files will be
deleted, and the printer will restart.
Turn off printer, wait a
while, and turn it on
again.
Invalid files will be
deleted.
Hardware error. 03800500-2F31 Non-discharge detection optical axis error Check the head management sensor.
03800500-2F31 Replace the head management sensor.
Turn off printer, wait, Replace the printhead.
then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F3C LF pressure error Check the pinch roller and surrounding part.
03130031-2F3C Replace the pinch roller pressure drive unit.
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.
Media Take-up error. 03890000-2920 Media take-up unit cannot take up the media Check to see if paper has not jammed.
Check the paper.
Press Online to clear
error.
Rewinding error. 03890000-2921 Media take-up take up the media continuously Check the media take-up paper detection sensor and
Check for jam at surrounding part.
indicated position. Replace the media take-up paper detection sensor.
Press Online to clear
error.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F3F HP maintenance jet pump motor error Check the purge unit.
03130031-2F3F
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.

8-9
 Chapter 8

Display massage Code* Condition detected Action

Hardware error. 03130031-2F3D HP maintenance jet pump motor overload error Check the purge unit.
03130031-2F3D
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.
Hardware error. 03130031-2F3E HP maintenance jet pump motor move timeout error Check the purge unit.
03130031-2F3E
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.
No printhead 03800100-2800 Printhead not installed Install the printhead.
Install printhead.
Wrong printhead. 03800200-2811 Printhead version error Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and
replace the printhead.
No maintenance 03841101-2818 Mauntenance cartridge not installed Install the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge.
Check the maintenance
cartridge.
This type of media is not 03860006-2825 Paper type mismatch at HP-GL/2 printing Exchange for the compatible paper to HP-GL/2 before
compatible with HP-GL/ reprinting.
2.
Cannot cut paper. 03870001-2019 Cut failure (during jam occure) Check the cutter unit and surrounding part.
Lift the release lever and Replace the cutter.
reload the paper.
Insufficient paper for job 03862001-2E31 Not enough roll media (upper roll) Renew the supply of roll media.
Insufficient paper for job 03862002-2E32 Not enough roll media (lower roll) Renew the supply of roll media.
Paper jam. 03010000-2E3A Madia load failure (upper roll) Check the pick-up unit and roll media.
Manually rewind roll all Check to see if paper has not jammed.
the way and press OK.
Paper jam. 03010000-2E3B Madia load failure (lower roll) Check the pick-up unit and roll media.
Manually rewind roll all Check to see if paper has not jammed.
the way and press OK.
Sheet printing is selected. 03060100-2E02 Cut sheet in not set Load cut sheets at the paper tray port.
Press Load/Eject and load
sheets.
Borderless printng not 03861001-2408 Borderless printing disabled (unsupported size) Check the media size.
possible. Check Change the media size.
supported paper.
Borderless printng not 03861001-2407 Borderless printing disabled (engine detection) Reload the paper.
possible. Paper stretched
or shrank.
Confirm usage cond. of
the paper.
Roll printing is selected. 03060A00-2E35 Roll media is not loaded for internal printing. Reload the roll media.
Press Load/Eject and load
a roll.
Media Take-up error. 03890000-2920 Use of the media take-up unit disabled Set [Take-up Reel] of main menu to [Enable].
Check the paper.
Press Online to clear
error.
Borderless printng not 03861001-2408 Borderless printing disabled during take up Check the media size.
possible. Check (unsupported size) Change the media size.
supported paper.
Borderless printng not 03861001-2407 Borderless printing disabled during take up (engine Reload the roll media.
possible. Paper stretched detection)
or shrank.
Confirm usage cond. of
the paper.

8-10
 Chapter 8

8.4 Sevice Call Table

8.4.1 Service Call Errors

0020-5739

iPF810 / iPF820

*Codes correspond to the numbers shown on the DISPLAY in the service mode.

T-8-4

Code Description Action

E141-4046 Number of recovery rotations reaching Replace the purge kit, and then clear the parts counter in the service mode.
50,000 or more
E146-4001 Borderless/flow idle ejection/mist recovery Replace the waste ink tank unit or mist fan or waste ink absorber or multi sensor reference,
count error and then clear the parts counter in the service mode.
E161-403E Abnormal temperature rise in printhead Replace the printhead.
E194-404A Non-discharging nozzle count error Replace the head management sensor unit, and then clear the parts counter in the service
mode.
E196-4040 Checksum error Replace the main controller PCB.
E196-4041 Flash memory erase error Replace the main controller PCB.
E196-4042 Flash memory write error Replace the main controller PCB.
E196-4045 EEPROM write error Replace the main controller PCB.
E196-404C Serial number mismatch between boards Execute PCB replacement mode or replace the main controller PCB.
E196-404D Machine ID mismatch between boards Replace the main controller PCB.
E196-404E EEPROM read error Replace the main controller PCB.
E198-401C RTC error Replace the lithium battery or replace the main controller PCB.
E198-401D RTC low battery error Replace the lithium battery or replace the main controller PCB.
E198-401E RTC clock stop Replace the lithium battery or replace the main controller PCB.
E199-404B Temperature/humidity sensor board Check the temperature/humidity sensor board connector or replace the board.
connector out of position
E602-401A HDD failure Replace the HDD unit.
E602-401B HDD connection error Check the HDD connector/Replace the HDD unit.
E144-4047 Number of carrriage scan operation is full Replace the tube unit, and then clear the parts counter in the service mode.
E144-4048 Printhead ink filling failure Replace the printhead.
E144-404F Number of pump rotation is full Replace the HP maintenance jet tray unit, and then clear the parts counter in the service
mode.
E196-4043 Memory error Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB.
E196-4044 Firmware size error Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB.

8-11
 Chapter 8

8-12
Aug 13 2008